Regal | 2000 | Owner`s manual | Regal 2000 Owner`s manual

Bumper-to-Bumper
3-years/36,000 miles (60 000 km)
Limited Warranty
Every
2000 Regal
under warranty is
backed with the
following
services:
1-800-252-1112
( For vehicles purchased in Canada,
call 1-800-268-6800)
that provides in an emergency:
Courtesy
Transportation
Free lockout assistance
Free dead-battery assistance
Free out-of-fuel assistance
Free flat-tire change
Emergency towing
2000 Buick Regal
Owner's Manual
Litho in U.S.A.
Part Number 10422240 A First Edition
© Copyright General Motors Corporation 1999
All Rights Reserved
i
Table of Contents
Seats and Restraint Systems
Section 1
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts
Air Bag Systems
Child Restraints
Features and Controls
Section 2
ii
Keys and Door Locks
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Trunk Release
Automatic Transmission
Parking Brake
Windows
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Windshield Wipers
Cruise Control
Interior and Exterior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Convenience Net (If Equipped)
Accessory Power Outlets/Auxiliary Power Connection
OnStar® System (If Equipped)
Sunroof (Option)
Instrument Panel, Warning Lights and Gages
Driver Information Center (Option)
Memory and Personalization/Personal Choice Feature
Table of Contents (cont'd)
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
Section 3
Heating and Air Conditioning
Setting the Radio Clock
Radio/Cassette Player/CD Player
Radio Theft-Deterrent Feature
Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)
Your Driving and the Road
Section 4
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Driving Tips for Various Road Conditions
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
Problems on the Road
Section 5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
Changing a Flat Tire
If You're Stuck
iii
Table of Contents (cont'd)
Service and Appearance Care
Section 6
Fuel
Checking Fluids and Lubricants
GM Oil Life System™ (If Equipped)
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Passenger Compartment Air Filter (If Equipped)
Brakes
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Tires and Wheels
Appearance Care
Electrical System/Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Maintenance Schedule
Section 7
iv
Scheduled Maintenance
Owner Checks and Services
Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Maintenance Records
Table of Contents (cont'd)
Customer Assistance Information
Section 8
Customer Satisfaction Procedures
Customer Assistance Offices
Roadside Assistance and Courtesy Transportation
Warranty Information (See Warranty Manual)
Reporting Safety Defects on page 8-10
Service Publications
Index
Section 9
In the Index you will find an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual.
You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.
Please refer to the last page of this manual for your Service Station Guide
v
We support voluntary
technician certification.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, BUICK,
the BUICK Emblem and the name REGAL are
registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time
it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
in the product after that time without further notice.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Buick Motor
Division whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new
owner can use it.
For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1577 Meyerside Dr.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1B9
vi
How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If
you do this, it will help you learn about the features
and controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll
find that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t
let this happen.”
vii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
NOTICE:
These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
In the notice area, we tell you about something that can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
not be covered by your warranty, and it could be
costly. But the notice will tell you what to do to help
avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different
colors or in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
viii
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:
MASTER
LIGHTING
SWITCH
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
TURN
SIGNALS
WINDSHIELD
WASHER
PARKING
LAMPS
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
POWER
WINDOW
AIR BAG
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
HAZARD
WARNING
FLASHER
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LAMPS
FOG LAMPS
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
VENTILATING
FAN
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMP
FUSE
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
LIGHTER
HORN
BRAKE
COOLANT
SPEAKER
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
FUEL
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
ix
Service Station Guide
Cooling System
For
a More
Detailed Look at
What's Under the Hood
Battery
See Section 5
See Section 6
Tire Pressure
See Section 6
Spare Tire Pressure
See Section 5
See Section 6
Hood Release
See Section 6
Windshield Washer
Fluid
See Section 6
Engine Oil Dipstick
See Section 6
Oil Viscosity
Engine Oil
See Section 6
Fuel
Use unleaded gas only,
87 Octane or higher.
See Section 6
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.
1-2
1-6
1-10
1-11
1-11
1-18
1-19
1-20
1-28
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Air Bag Systems
Rear Seat Passengers
1-31
1-33
1-35
1-37
1-52
1-55
1-55
1-55
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Center Passenger Position
Children
Child Restraints
Larger Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash
1-
1-1
Seats and Seat Controls
2-Way Manual Seat
This section tells you how to adjust the seats and
explains the reclining seatbacks and head restraints.
Manual Front Seat
CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat using an
upward motion. This will unlock the seat. Slide the seat
to where you want it and release the bar. Try to move
the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked
into place.
1-2
6-Way Power Seat (If Equipped)
Heated Seats (If Equipped)
The driver’s switch is
located on the left side of
the driver’s seat cushion.
The passenger’s switch is
located on the right side
of the passenger’s
seat cushion.
To move the seat forward or rearward, push the switch
forward or rearward. To raise or lower the entire seat,
push the switch up or down. To raise or lower the front
portion of your seat, push the front of the switch up or
down. To raise or lower the rear portion of your seat,
push the rear of the switch up or down.
If your vehicle is equipped with heated seats, the
driver’s side and passenger’s side three-position
switches are located on the center console, just behind
your automatic transaxle shift lever. Press LO to warm
the seat at a lower temperature. Press HI to warm the
seat at a higher temperature. To turn this feature off,
return the switch to its center position. The button
directly in the middle of the heated seat switches is used
for traction control. (See “Traction Control System” in
the Index.)
1-3
Reclining Front Seatbacks
Lift the lever to release the seatback, then move the
seatback to where you want it. Release the lever to
lock the seatback in place. Pull up on the lever
without pushing on the seatback and the seatback
will move forward.
1-4
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
Head Restraints
CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do their job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.
Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the
restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Split Folding Rear Seat
This feature enables you
to access your trunk by
pulling forward on the
seat tab, located on the
front of the rear seat,
to fold the seat
cushion down.
This feature allows your direct access to the trunk.
To return the seat to its original position, push it back
up and make sure it latches.
1-5
CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear a
safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and you’re
not wearing a safety belt, your injuries can be much
worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed.
In the same crash, you might not be if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check
that your passengers’ belts are fastened properly too.
A lock out feature is located on the rear of the seat back
when folded down. This will disengage the inside seat
tab when the release is locked. The seat will then only
open from the tab on the rear of the seat back, located
inside the trunk.
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the air bag system.
1-6
CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light that
comes on as a reminder to
buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.)
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.
1-7
Put someone on it.
1-8
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
or the instrument panel ...
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
1-9
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-10
A:
You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q:
If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be
in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
Q:
If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding
in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called
“Children.” Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can sit up straight.
1-11
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
1-12
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash, or
if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
To move it down, squeeze the release lever and the
shoulder belt guide as shown and move the height
adjuster to the desired position. You can move the
adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt
guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without squeezing the release lever
to make sure it has locked into position.
1-13
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is
centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from
your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-14
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-15
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-16
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work properly,
or ask your dealer to fix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-17
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-18
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
safety belt properly, see “Driver Position” earlier in
this section.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt -- except for two things.
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch
plate and keep pulling until you can buckle the belt.
On some vehicles, if you pull the shoulder portion of the
belt out all the way, you will engage the child restraint
locking feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back
all the way and start again.
1-19
Air Bag Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact air
bag systems.
Your vehicle has air bags -- a frontal air bag for the
driver and another frontal air bag for the right front
passenger. Your vehicle may also have a side impact air
bag for the driver. If your vehicle has a side impact air
bag for the driver it will say AIR BAG on the air bag
covering on the side of the driver’s seatback closest to
the door.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag.
But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
1-20
Here are the most important things to know about the air
bag systems:
CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt -- even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air
bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety
belts. All air bags are designed to work with
safety belts but don’t replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
Frontal air bags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to work only in moderate
to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle
hits something. They aren’t designed to inflate
at all in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal
crashes. And, for unrestrained occupants,
frontal air bags may provide less protection in
frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have
provided in the past. The side impact air bag for
the driver is designed to inflate only in moderate
to severe crashes where something hits the
driver’s side of the vehicle. It isn’t designed to
inflate in frontal, in rollover or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly -- whether or not there’s an air bag
for that person.
1-21
CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate with
great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If
you’re too close to an inflating air bag, as you
would be if you were leaning forward, it could
seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you in
position for air bag inflation before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
frontal air bags. The driver should sit as far back
as possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle, and should not lean on the door.
CAUTION: (Continued)
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety
belt system nor its air bag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly in your
vehicle. To read how, see the part of this manual
called “Children.”
There is an air bag
readiness light on
the instrument panel
cluster, which shows
the air bag symbol.
CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protection for adults, but not for young
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-22
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
How the Air Bag Systems Work
Where are the air bags?
The right front passenger’s frontal air bag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-23
CAUTION: (Continued)
of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t
put anything between an occupant and an air
bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering and don’t let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact air bag.
When should an air bag inflate?
The driver’s side impact air bag is in the side of the
driver’s seatback closest to the door.
CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an air
bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person. The path
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-24
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal crashes. The frontal air bags are designed to
inflate only if the impact speed is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight
into a wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold
level is about 12 to 18 mph (19 to 29 km/h). The
threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle
design, so that it can be somewhat above or below this
range. If your vehicle strikes something that will move
or deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will
be higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers,
side impacts, or rear impacts, because inflation would
not help the occupant.
The driver’s side impact air bag is designed to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes involving the driver’s
door. The side impact air bag will inflate if the crash
severity is above the system’s designed “threshold
level.” The threshold level can vary with specific
vehicle design. The driver’s side impact air bag is not
designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle
of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down
in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For the side impact
air bag, inflation is determined by the location and
severity of the impact.
What makes an air bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both
frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates
the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware
are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering
wheel, instrument panel and the side of the driver’s
seatback closest to the door.
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But the frontal air
bags would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts, and side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
the air bag. The side impact air bag would not help you
in many types of collisions, including frontal or near
frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, primarily
because the occupant’s motion is not toward that air bag.
Air bags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in
moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions for
the driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags,
and only in moderate to severe side collisions for the
driver’s side impact air bag.
1-25
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module -- the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag,
the side of the seatback closest to the door for the
driver’s side impact air bag -- will be hot for a short
time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with
you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the
driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,
nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-26
CAUTION: (Continued)
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
D Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for your
air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag
system won’t be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include air bag modules
and possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
D Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records information about
the frontal air bag system. The module records
information about the readiness of the system, when
the system commands air bag inflation and driver’s
safety belt usage at deployment. Some modules also
record speed, engine rpm, brake and throttle data.
D Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
systems. Improper service can mean that an air bag
system won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or
the right front passenger’s air bag, or the air bag
covering on the driver’s seatback, the bag may not
work properly. You may have to replace the air
bag module in the steering wheel, both the air bag
module and the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s air bag, or the air bag module
and seatback for the driver’s side impact air bag.
Do not open or break the air bag coverings.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systems in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing your vehicle and the
air bag systems. To purchase a service manual, see
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air
bag can still inflate during improper service. You
can be injured if you are close to an air bag when
it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are
probably part of the air bag systems. Be sure to
follow proper service procedures, and make sure
the person performing work for you is qualified
to do so.
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-27
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1-28
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
On some vehicles, when the shoulder belt is pulled
out all the way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all
the way and start again. If the belt is not long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
1-29
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-30
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown
child restraints and for small adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide pulls the belt away
from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position in
the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for
children who have outgrown child restraints and for
smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on
the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide
and use the safety belt:
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-31
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into
the slots of the guide.
1-32
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide
on top.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the belt
edges together so that you can take them out from the
guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip,
and then slide the guide onto the clip. Rotate the guide and
clip inward and in between the seatback and the interior
body, leaving only the loop of elastic cord exposed.
Center Passenger Position
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions”
earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
1-33
Lap Belt
When you sit in the center seating position, you have a
lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
1-34
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither
the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler
changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Smaller Children and Babies
CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety
belt system nor its air bag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle.
CAUTION:
Smaller children and babies should always be
restrained in a child or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraint will say whether it
is the right type and size for your child. A very
young child’s hip bones are so small that a
regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it
should. Instead, the belt will likely be over the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure that
any child small enough for one is always properly
restrained in a child or infant restraint.
Infants need complete support, including support for the
head and neck. This is necessary because an infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the
rest of its body. In a frontal crash, an infant in a rear-facing
restraint settles into the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of the infant’s body,
the back and shoulders. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate infant restraint. This is so important that many
hospitals today won’t release a newborn infant to its
parents unless there is an infant restraint available for the
baby’s first trip in a motor vehicle.
1-35
CAUTION: (Continued)
at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The baby would be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure the baby in an infant restraint.
CAUTION:
Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much -- until a
crash. During a crash a baby will become so
heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-36
Child Restraints
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have protection provided by
appropriate restraints.
Q:
What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
A:
Add-on child restraints are available in four basic
types. When selecting a child restraint, take into
consideration not only the child’s weight and size,
but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.
An infant car bed (A) is a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. With an infant car bed,
make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the
center of the vehicle.
1-37
A rear-facing infant restraint (B) positions an infant
to face the rear of the vehicle. Rear-facing infant
restraints are designed for infants of up to about
20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one year of age. This type
of restraint faces the rear so that the infant’s head,
neck and body can have the support they need
in a frontal crash. Some infant seats come in
two parts -- the base stays secured in the vehicle
and the seat part is removable.
1-38
A forward-facing child restraint (C-E) positions
a child upright to face forward in the vehicle.
These forward-facing restraints are designed to
help protect children who are from 20 to 40 lbs.
(9 to 18 kg) and about 26 to 40 inches
(66 to 102 cm) in height, or up to around four
years of age. One type, a convertible restraint, is
designed to be used either as a rear-facing infant
seat or a forward-facing child seat.
1-39
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is,
it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
The instructions that come with the infant or child
restraint will show you how to do that. Both the owner’s
manual and the child restraint instructions are important,
so if either one of these is not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
A booster seat (F) is designed for children who
are about 40 to 60 lbs., or even up to 80 lbs.
(18 to 27 kg, or even up to 36 kg), and about four
to eight years of age. A booster seat is designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Booster seats with shields use lap-only belts;
however, booster seats without shields use
lap-shoulder belts. Booster seats can also help
a child to see out the window.
1-40
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your
child restraint in the rear seat. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:
Top Strap
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure
a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, but before you do, always
move the front passenger seat as far back as it
will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people
in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints also
have a top strap. If your child restraint has a top strap,
it should be anchored.
Your vehicle has top strap anchors already installed for
the rear seating positions. You’ll find them behind the
rear seat on the filler panel.
1-41
In order to get to a bracket, you’ll have to open the trim cover.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier
part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
Anchor the top strap to this bracket. Once you have the
top strap anchored, you’ll be ready to secure the child
restraint itself.
1-42
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-43
5. Some vehicles have a child restraint locking feature
on the shoulder belt retractor. You can tell if your
vehicle has this feature by pulling the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor. Then, let the belt go
back a few inches, and try to pull the belt out again.
If you can’t pull the belt out because it has locked,
it means the retractor has the child restraint locking
feature. If the belt doesn’t lock and you can pull the
belt out of the retractor again, it means your vehicle
doesn’t have the child restraint locking feature on the
shoulder belt retractor.
1-44
D If your vehicle has the child restraint locking
feature on the shoulder belt retractor, pull the rest
of the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock.
To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor while you push down on the
child restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
D If your vehicle doesn’t have the child restraint
locking feature on the shoulder belt retractor,
tighten the belt by pulling up on the shoulder belt
while you push down on the child restraint. If
you’re using a forward-facing child restraint you
may find it helpful to use your knee to push down
on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-45
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Rear Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap belt. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
See the earlier part about the top strap if the child
restraint has one.
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
1-46
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint. If you’re using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger
child passenger.
1-47
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier
part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure
a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
1-48
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air
bag, always move the seat as far back as it will go
before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
(See “Seats” in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-49
5. Some vehicles have a child restraint locking feature
on the shoulder belt retractor. You can tell if your
vehicle has this feature by pulling the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor. Then, let the belt go
back a few inches, and try to pull the belt out again.
If you can’t pull the belt out because it has locked, it
means the retractor has the child restraint locking
feature. If the belt doesn’t lock and you can pull the
belt out of the retractor again, it means your vehicle
doesn’t have the child restraint locking feature on the
shoulder belt retractor.
1-50
D If your vehicle has the child restraint locking
feature on the shoulder belt retractor, pull the rest
of the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock.
To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor while you push down on the
child restraint. You may find it helpful to use
your knee to push down on the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
D If your vehicle doesn’t have the child restraint
locking feature on the shoulder belt retractor,
tighten the belt by pulling up on the shoulder belt
while you push down on the child restraint. You
may find it helpful to use your knee to push down
on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-51
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child restraints should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the
safety belts properly.
D Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in
a crash.
D Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other
people who are.
1-52
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact forces.
In a crash, the two children can be crushed
together and seriously injured. A belt must be
used by only one person at a time.
Q:
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is
very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide. If the
child is sitting in a rear seat outside position, see
“Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index.
If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still
very close to the child’s face or neck, you might
want to place the child in the center seat position,
the one that has only a lap belt.
1-53
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in this way,
in a crash the child might slide under the belt.
The belt’s force would then be applied right on
the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-54
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will
be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at
the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
in this section.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-55
Section 2 Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.
2- 2
2- 4
2- 7
2- 14
2- 15
2- 16
2- 17
2- 18
2- 19
2- 21
2- 22
2- 27
2- 28
2- 30
2- 32
2- 32
2- 33
2- 34
Keys
Door Locks
Remote Keyless Entry
Trunk
Theft
PASS-KeyR II
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
Windows
2-
2- 34
2- 35
2- 35
2- 41
2- 44
2- 47
2- 49
2- 51
2- 52
2- 52
2- 53
2- 54
2- 55
2- 56
2- 59
2- 75
Horn
Tilt-Wheel Adjustable Steering Column
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Sun Visors
Accessory Power Outlet
Auxiliary Power Connection (Power Drop)
OnStarRSystem (If Equipped)
Sunroof (If Equipped)
The Instrument Panel -- Your
Information System
Instrument Panel Cluster
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
Driver Information Center (Option)
2-1
Keys
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
2-2
The ignition key is for
the ignition only.
The ignition and door keys don’t have plugs. Your
dealer or Buick Premium Roadside Assistance has the
code for your keys.
If you need a new ignition or door key, contact your
dealer who can obtain the correct key code, or in an
emergency, call Buick Premium Roadside Assistance at
1-800-252-1112. In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.
NOTICE:
The door key is for the
doors and all other locks.
Your vehicle has a number of features that can
help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock
your keys inside. You may even have to damage
your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have
extra keys.
2-3
Door Locks
CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers -- especially children -- can easily
open the doors and fall out. When a door is
locked, the inside handle won’t open it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
This may not be so obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors, and you will be far
better off whenever you drive your vehicle.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your door key or remote keyless
entry transmitter.
2-4
From the inside, to lock or unlock the door manually,
push the lever forward to lock the door. To unlock, push
the lever rearward.
Power Door Locks
Your vehicle is equipped
with front power door lock
switches. Press the power
door lock switch to lock or
unlock all doors.
Programmable Automatic Power
Door Locks
Programmable automatic power door locks is a standard
feature that is intended to provide enhanced security and
convenience by automatically locking and unlocking
doors. This feature provides four operating modes.
For your vehicle, you may select and program one of
the following four operating modes:
Mode 1: No automatic door lock or unlock.
The rear doors do not have power door lock switches.
Use the manual lock levers to lock or unlock each
rear door.
Mode 2: Automatic all-door lock when the transaxle
is shifted out of PARK (P); no automatic door unlock.
Automatic door relock when any door is unlocked,
opened and then all doors are again closed while the
vehicle is not in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and the
driver’s foot is on the brake pedal.
Mode 3: Automatic all-door lock when the transaxle
is shifted out of PARK (P). Automatic all-door unlock
when the transaxle is shifted into PARK (P). Automatic
door relock when any door is unlocked, opened and
then all doors are closed again while the vehicle is not in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and the driver’s foot is on
the brake pedal.
2-5
Mode 4: Automatic all-door lock when the transaxle is
shifted out of PARK (P). Automatic driver’s door only
unlock when the transaxle is shifted into PARK (P).
Automatic door relock when any door is unlocked,
opened and then all doors are closed again while the
vehicle is not in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and the
driver’s foot is on the brake pedal.
Disconnecting the vehicle’s battery for up to a year
will not change the last programmed mode of the
programmable automatic power door locks.
Rear-Door Child Security Locks
Your vehicle is equipped
with rear-door child
security locks that help
prevent passengers from
opening the rear doors
of your vehicle from
the inside. To use one
of these locks:
The programmable automatic power door locks
operating mode will be changed when the driver
performs the following:
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN.
2. Close all of the doors.
3. Apply your brakes.
4. Press and hold the power door lock switch. While
holding the door lock switch, move the shift lever
out of and back into PARK (P).
After an initial transaxle cycle, each additional cycle
will advance the operating mode by one, starting from
the current operating mode. During this procedure, the
automatic door lock and unlock functions will operate as
defined by each mode listed previously, providing the
driver with feedback of the current operating mode. If
cycled beyond Mode 4, the vehicle will enter operating
Mode 1. When the door lock switch is released, the
vehicle will remain in the most recent operating mode.
2-6
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2. On the inside of the rear door will be a lock. Insert
your key into this lock and turn it upward. This will
engage the safety lock. To disengage the feature, turn
the lock downward.
3. Close the door.
4. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.
The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use. If you want to
open the rear door when the security lock is on, unlock
the door from the inside and then open the door from
the outside.
Lockout Protection Feature
The feature works by disabling the power door locks
when a key is in the ignition and any door is open.
You may override the lockout protection feature by
holding the power door lock switch in the lock position
for more than three seconds while the key is in the
ignition and any door is open.
Remember, this feature can’t guarantee that you’ll never
be locked out of your vehicle. If you use the manual
door lock or if you don’t leave the key in the ignition,
you could still lock your keys inside your vehicle.
Always remember to take your keys with you.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your
door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and
close the door. (Also see “Delayed Locking” in this
section for more information.)
Remote Keyless Entry
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock
your doors or unlock your trunk from about 3 feet (1 m)
up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry
transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
Your remote keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-7
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
D Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
D Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
Operation
Press UNLOCK once to
unlock the driver’s door and
to turn on the interior lamps
(see “Illumination on
Remote Activation” in the
Index for more details).
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
D Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See the instructions that follow.
D If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
The perimeter lighting feature will also be activated at
night, turning on your headlamps and back-up lamps for
approximately 25 seconds when the UNLOCK button is
pressed. (This will light the area around the vehicle.)
See “Perimeter Lighting” in the Index.
Press UNLOCK again within five seconds to unlock all
the doors. To lock all doors, press LOCK. To unlock the
trunk, press the button with the trunk symbol on the
remote keyless entry transmitter. The trunk will only
unlock if your transaxle is in PARK (P).
2-8
Instant Alarm
This feature allows you to activate an alarm by pressing
a button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. Your
ignition must be off for the instant alarm to work. When
you press the horn button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter, the headlamps will flash, the horn will honk
repeatedly, and the interior lamps will illuminate,
attracting attention if you need it. The alarm will
continue until:
D You press the alarm button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter a second time,
You may select one of four operating modes for
reception of a lock command. You may also select one
of four operating modes for reception of an unlock
command. The selection and programming of the lock
and unlock operating modes are independent of each
other. The following modes are available for either lock
or unlock verification:
Mode 1: No Verification
Mode 2: Horn Chirp only
Mode 3: Headlamp Flash only
D the ignition is in RUN or
D an alarm period of about two minutes has elapsed.
Mode 4: Horn Chirp and Headlamp Flash
Security Feedback
D
D
D
D
Security feedback provides audible and/or visible
feedback confirming that a remote keyless entry lock or
unlock command has been received and executed. Your
ignition must be off for this feature to work.
The operating mode of the security feedback lock feature
will be changed when you perform the following:
Turn the ignition key to RUN.
Close all the doors.
Press and hold the power door lock switch.
While holding the door lock switch, press and
release the remote keyless entry transmitter
lock button.
This will start the customization mode. While in the
customization mode, the feature will sound the number
of chimes corresponding to the current security feedback
lock mode.
2-9
Each additional press of the remote keyless entry
transmitter LOCK button will cause your vehicle to
advance the lock mode by one, starting from the current
lock mode. If cycled beyond lock Mode 4, the vehicle
will enter lock Mode 1. During this procedure, the
feature will sound the number of chimes corresponding
to the current lock mode, providing you with feedback.
When the door lock switch is released, the vehicle will
remain in the most recent lock mode.
The operating mode of the security feedback unlock
feature will be changed when you perform the following
sequence with your vehicle’s doors closed and the
ignition key in RUN:
Each additional press of the remote keyless entry
transmitter unlock button will cause your vehicle to
advance the UNLOCK mode by one, starting from the
current unlock mode. If cycled beyond unlock Mode 4,
the vehicle will enter unlock Mode 1. During this
procedure, the feature will sound the number of chimes
corresponding to the current unlock mode, providing
you with feedback. When the door unlock switch is
released, the vehicle will remain in the most recent
unlock mode.
Disconnecting the vehicle’s battery for up to a year will
not change the programmed mode of the lock and
unlock security feedback features.
D Press and hold the power door unlock switch. While
Delayed Locking
D While in the customization mode, the feature will
Delayed locking allows a brief time period for you to
re-enter the vehicle after the the doors have been closed
and locked. Delayed locking is user programmable for
enabling or disabling the feature.
holding the door unlock switch, press and release the
remote keyless entry transmitter unlock button. This
will start the customization mode.
sound the number of chimes corresponding to the
current unlock mode.
2-10
Delayed locking is activated when a door lock switch is
pressed while the key is not in the vehicle’s ignition, and
a door is open. The door lock switch may be either the
lock switch on the door or on the remote keyless entry
transmitter (see “Remote Keyless Entry” later in this
section for more details). The doors do not lock when
the lock switch is pressed, but instead, three chimes are
heard. These chimes indicate that the Delayed locking
function has been activated.
You may also customize your vehicle to activate the
delayed locking feature as described above, or you
may choose to completely disable the feature at all
times. If disabled, the power door locks will activate
immediately when a power door lock switch is pressed.
The enabled/disabled state of the delayed locking
feature will be toggled when you perform the following
sequence with the doors closed and the ignition key
in RUN:
You have three actions possible once delayed locking
is activated:
1. Apply your brakes.
D Cancel the delayed locking by pressing the unlock
switch or by fully inserting the key in the ignition.
D Override the delayed locking feature and lock the
doors immediately by pressing the lock switch a
second time.
D Let the delayed locking feature complete the locking
of the vehicle.
If you wish to let the delayed locking feature complete
the locking of the vehicle, no additional action is
required. The delayed locking feature will lock the doors
automatically after all the doors have been closed for a
period of five seconds. During this five second period,
any door may be reopened, at which time the three
possible actions shown above are again available.
2. Press and hold the power door unlock switch. While
holding the door unlock switch, move the shift lever
out of and back into PARK (P).
After an initial transaxle cycle, each additional cycle
will toggle the enable/disable state of the delayed
locking feature. During this procedure, the chime will
sound, providing you with feedback. In Mode1, a single
chime will be heard if the delayed locking feature is
disabled. In Mode 2, two chimes will be heard if the
feature is enabled. When the door unlock switch is
released, the vehicle will remain in the most recent
operating mode.
Disconnecting the vehicle battery for up to a year will
not change the programmed mode of the delayed
locking feature.
2-11
Illumination on Remote Activation
Battery Replacement
This feature provides interior lighting when a remote
keyless entry door unlock command is received and
executed by your vehicle. Your ignition must be off for
the illumination on remote activation feature to work.
The interior lamps will light until either the ignition is
turned to RUN or for a period of 40 seconds has elapsed.
If a door is opened during this period, the timed lighting
will be canceled, and the interior lamps will remain on
since a door is open. Also see “Perimeter Lighting” in
the Index.
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about three years.
Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you go to your
dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four transmitters
matched to it.
2-12
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch
any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.
4. Test the operation of the transmitter with
your vehicle. If the transmitter does not
work, try resynchronizing the transmitter.
(See “Resynchronization” following.)
5. Resynchronize and then test the transmitter.
Resynchronization
Resynchronization may be necessary due to the
security method used by this remote keyless entry
system. The transmitter does not send the same signal
twice to the receiver. The receiver will not respond to
a signal it has previously been sent. This prevents
someone from recording and playing back the signal
from the transmitter.
To replace the battery:
1. Insert a flat object like a dime into the slot on the
back of the transmitter. Gently pry apart the front
and back.
2. Remove the old battery and replace it with the new
one. (Use type CR2032 or an equivalent.) Make sure
the positive (+) side of the battery is facing down.
Do not use a metal object to remove the old battery.
3. Snap the top and bottom together, making sure the
halves are together tightly so water won’t get in.
To resynchronize the transmitter with the receiver, do
the following:
1. Stand close to your vehicle.
2. Simultaneously press and hold the LOCK and
UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter for about
seven seconds.
There will be an audible confirmation when
resynchronization is done.
If the locks do not cycle, see your dealer for service.
2-13
Trunk
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk open
because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into
your vehicle. You can’t see or smell CO. It can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the trunk open or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections
must pass through the seal between the body
and the trunk:
D Make sure all other windows are shut.
D Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the setting
on VENT. That will force outside air into
your vehicle. See “Comfort Controls” in
the Index.
D If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
2-14
Trunk Lock
To unlock the trunk from the outside, insert the door key
and turn it. You can also press the car symbol on your
remote keyless entry transmitter.
Remote Trunk Release
Press the button behind the
glove box door to unlock
the trunk from inside the
vehicle. The shift lever must
be in PARK (P) for the
remote trunk release button
to work.
Theft
Parking Lots
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys.
But what if you have to leave your ignition key?
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key
from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.
Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your
ignition and transaxle. And remember to lock the doors.
D If possible, park in a busy, well lit area.
D Put your valuables in a storage area, like your
trunk or glove box. Be sure to close and lock the
storage area.
D
D
D
D
Close all windows.
Lock the glove box.
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
Then take the door key and remote keyless entry
transmitter with you.
Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.
2-15
PASS-KeyR II
Your vehicle is equipped
with the PASS-Key II
(Personalized Automotive
Security System)
theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key II is a passive
theft-deterrent system. It
works when you insert
or remove the key from
the ignition.
PASS-Key II uses a resistor pellet in the ignition key
that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
2-16
When the PASS-Key II system senses that someone is
using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s starter
and fuel systems. For about three minutes, the starter
won’t work and fuel won’t go to the engine. If someone
tries to start your vehicle again or uses another key
during this time, the vehicle will not start. This
discourages someone from randomly trying different
keys with different resistor pellets in an attempt to make
a match.
The ignition key must be clean and dry before it’s inserted
in the ignition or the engine may not start. If the engine
does not start and the SECURITY light is flashing, the key
may be dirty or wet. Turn the ignition off.
Clean and dry the key. Wait about three minutes and try
again. If the starter still won’t work, and the key appears
to be clean and dry, wait about three minutes and try
another ignition key. At this time, you may also want to
check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the
Index). If the starter won’t work with the other key, your
vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start, the first
ignition key may be faulty. See your dealer or a
locksmith who can service the PASS-Key II.
If you accidentally use a key that has a damaged or
missing resistor pellet, the starter won’t work. The
SECURITY light will then come on. But you don’t have
to wait three minutes before trying another ignition key.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service the
PASS-Key II to have a new key made.
If you’re ever driving and the SECURITY light comes
on, you will be able to restart your engine if you turn it
off. Your PASS-Key II system, however, is not working
properly and must be serviced by your dealer. Your
vehicle is not protected by the PASS-Key II system.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key II ignition key, see
your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key II
to have a new key made. In an emergency, call the
Buick Premium Roadside Assistance Center at
1-800-252-1112. In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.
New Vehicle “Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the
long run if you follow these guidelines:
D Don’t drive at any one speed -- fast or
slow -- for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
D Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
D Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for
more information.
2-17
Ignition Positions
LOCK (B): Before you put the key into the ignition
switch, the switch is in LOCK. It’s also the only position
from which you can remove your key. This position
locks your ignition, steering wheel and transaxle. It’s a
theft-deterrent feature.
OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine but
still turn the steering wheel. It doesn’t lock the steering
wheel. Use OFF if you must have your vehicle pushed
or towed.
RUN (D): This position is where the key returns
after you start your vehicle. With the engine off, you
can use RUN to display some of your warning and
indicator lights.
With the ignition key in the ignition, you can turn the
switch to five positions:
ACCESSORY (A): The accessory position lets you use
the radio and windshield wipers when the engine is off.
To use ACC, push in the key and turn it toward you.
Your steering wheel will stay locked.
2-18
START (E): This position starts your engine.
Starting Your Engine
A warning chime will sound if you open the driver’s
door when the ignition is in OFF, LOCK or
ACCESSORY and the key is in the ignition.
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t
turn it, be sure you are using the correct key;
if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the
key hard. But turn the key only with your hand.
Using a tool to force it could break the key or the
ignition switch. If none of this works, then your
vehicle needs service.
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
NOTICE:
If you cannot remove your key from the ignition
and the gear shift is in PARK (P) (with the shift
knob button fully released), see “Shift Lock
Release” in the index.
2-19
Starting Your V6 Engine
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid
draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in
START for about three to five seconds at a time until
your engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between
each try to help avoid draining your battery or
damaging your starter.
2-20
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold the key in START for
about three seconds. If the vehicle starts briefly but
then stops again, do the same thing, but this time keep
the pedal down for five or six seconds. This clears the
extra gasoline from the engine. After waiting about
15 seconds, repeat the normal starting procedure.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your vehicle towed,
see the part of this manual that tells how to do
it without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is attached to the underside of the vehicle’s
diagonal brace, which is located above the air
cleaner assembly.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
CAUTION:
In very cold weather, 0_F (-18_C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
2-21
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Your automatic transaxle
has a shift lever on the
console between the seats.
2-22
The above graphic is also displayed on your instrument
panel cluster.
Maximum engine speed is limited on automatic
transaxle vehicles when you’re in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) to protect driveline components from
improper operation.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This locks your front wheels. It’s the best
position to use when you start your engine because your
vehicle can’t move easily.
CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer”
in the Index.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle shiftlock control system. You must fully apply
your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the ignition is in RUN. If you cannot shift out of
PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever by pushing it
all the way into PARK (P) while keeping the brake pedal
pushed down. Release the shift lever button. Then move
the shift lever out of PARK (P). See “Shifting Out of
PARK (P)” in the Index.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
NOTICE:
Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle
is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see “If
You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
2-23
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine
doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
B
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE ( ): This position is
for normal driving. If you need more power for passing,
and you’re:
D Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
CAUTION:
Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed)
is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit people
or objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.
NOTICE:
Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out
of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine
racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
2-24
D Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
NOTICE:
If your vehicle seems to start up rather slowly,
or if it seems not to shift gears as you go faster,
something may be wrong with a transaxle system
sensor. If you drive very far that way, your
vehicle can be damaged. So, if this happens,
have your vehicle serviced right away. Until then,
you can use SECOND (2) when you are driving
less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE ( ) for higher speeds.
B
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving, but it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE ( ).
B
Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE ( ):
B
D When driving on hilly, winding roads.
D When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears.
D When going down a steep hill.
D When driving in no-highway scenarios
(i.e. city streets, etc.)
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to use
your brakes off and on.
NOTICE:
Don’t drive in SECOND (2) for more than
25 miles (40 km), or at speeds over 55 mph
(90 km/h), or you can damage your transaxle.
Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE ( ) or
THIRD (3) as much as possible.
Don’t shift into SECOND (2) unless you are going
slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can
damage your engine.
B
2-25
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle won’t shift
into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
NOTICE:
If your front wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happen if you were stuck in
very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid
object. You could damage your transaxle.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This could overheat and damage the
transaxle. Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P)
to hold your vehicle in position on a hill.
Driver Selectable Shift (If Equipped)
Press the driver selectable
shift button, located on the
shift lever, to allow the
transaxle to shift at higher
engine speeds, increasing
shift firmness and
acceleration performance.
The PERF SHIFT light
on your instrument panel
cluster will glow when the
driver selectable shifting
feature is in performance
shift mode.
Downshifts will occur at a lower percentage of
accelerator use while you’re in the driver selectable
shift mode.
2-26
Press the button again to return to normal shifting. The
PERF SHIFT light will turn off when in normal shifting
mode. The transaxle will then shift at lower engine
speeds, increasing fuel economy.
Parking Brake
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,
the ignition is on and the shift lever is not in PARK (P)
or NEUTRAL (N).
NOTICE:
To set the parking brake,
hold the regular brake
pedal down with your
right foot. Push down the
parking brake pedal with
your left foot.
Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on any hill, see
“Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot and push the parking
brake pedal with your left foot. When you lift your left
foot, the parking brake pedal will follow it to the
released position.
2-27
Shifting Into PARK (P)
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that
follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake with your left foot.
2-28
2. Move the shift lever into
PARK (P) by holding in
the button on the lever
and then pushing the
lever all the way toward
the front of your vehicle.
Then turn the ignition
key to LOCK.
3. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine running unless you have to.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the
shift lever out of PARK (P) without first pushing the
button. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t
fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” in the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-29
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
CAUTION:
Before shifting out of PARK (P) you must
fully apply your regular brakes. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could
be injured.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever by pushing it all the way into PARK (P)
while keeping the brake pedal pushed down. Then move
the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the engine and shift to the drive gear you want.
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shiftlock control
system. You must fully apply your regular brakes before
you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN.
See “Automatic Transaxle Operation” in the Index.
2-30
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
The first access slot is located underneath the steering
column below the lock cylinder. To use this slot:
Shift Lock Release
Your vehicle is equipped
with an electric park lock
system. The system is
designed to prevent ignition
key removal unless the
shift lever is in PARK (P)
(with the shift knob button
fully released).
D Verify that the shift lever is in PARK (P) (with the
shift knob button released.)
D Remove the override access slot cap, which will then
show the override mechanism release button.
D Insert a key or screwdriver into the access slot and
then press in and hold the override mechanism
release button.
D Turn the ignition key to OFF.
D Remove the key from the ignition switch.
D Put the override access slot cap back on.
The system also prevents the shift lever from moving
out of PARK (P) when the ignition is in OFF or in
LOCK. The park lock system is always functional
except in the case of a dead or low voltage (less than
9 V) battery.
You will not be able to remove your key from the
ignition unless the shift lever is in PARK (P) with the
shift knob button fully released.
If your vehicle has a dead battery or a battery with low
voltage, there are two override access slots that will
allow you to override the park lock system.
D Remove the override access slot cap.
D Insert a key or screwdriver into the access slot, press
The second override access slot is located on the upper
right side of the shift panel. To use this slot:
in and hold the override mechanism release button.
D Pull the shift lever into the desired gear position.
D Reinstall the override access slot cap back on.
2-31
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.
2-32
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
D Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
D Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
D Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
D Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the road or over road debris.
D Repairs weren’t done correctly.
D Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
D Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
D Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control system
off could allow dangerous exhaust into your
vehicle (see the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with
CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
(See “Blizzard” in the Index.)
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling a
trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
2-33
Windows
Power Windows
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature. This switch is labeled AUTO. Tap the rear of
the switch and the driver’s window will open a small
amount. If the rear of the switch is pressed all the way
down, the window will go all the way down.
To stop the window while it is lowering, press the front
of the switch. To raise the window, press and hold the
front of the switch.
The driver’s window controls also include a lock-out
switch. Press LOCK to stop front and rear passengers
from using their window switches. The driver can still
control all the windows with the lock on. Press the other
side of the LOCK button for normal window operation.
Horn
Press the horn symbols on your steering wheel pad to
sound the horn.
Switches on the driver’s door armrest control each of the
windows when the ignition is on. In addition, each
passenger’s door has a switch for its own window.
2-34
Tilt-Wheel Adjustable
Steering Column
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
A tilt steering wheel allows
you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive.
You can also raise it to the
highest level to give your
legs more room when you
exit and enter the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level,
then release the lever to lock the wheel into place.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes your:
D
D
D
D
D
D
Turn and Lane Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control
Flash-to-Pass Feature
2-35
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
The turn signal has the following positions: two upward
(for right) and two downward (for left). These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the turn or
lane change.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it.
If the arrow flashes faster than normal as you signal a
turn or a lane change, a signal bulb may be burned out
and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
2-36
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then check
the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index).
A chime will sound if you leave your turn signal on for
more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km).
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
To change your headlamps from low beams to high
beams, or high to low, pull the multifunction lever all
the way toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams
are on, this indicator light
located on the instrument
panel cluster will also be on.
Flash-to-Pass Feature
Windshield Wipers
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are off.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you a little,
but not so far that you hear a click.
If your headlamps are off or on low beam, your
high-beam headlamps will turn on. They’ll stay on
as long as you hold the lever toward you and the
high-beam indicator on the dash will come on.
Release the lever to return to normal operation.
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
marked WIPER. For a single wiping cycle, turn the band
to MIST. Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go.
The wipers will stop after one cycle. If you want more
cycles, hold the band on MIST longer.
2-37
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band to LO.
For high-speed wiping, turn the band further, to HI.
To stop the wipers, turn the band to OFF.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or
snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The
closer to LO, the shorter the delay between wipes.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A circuit
breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away
snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Windshield Washer
At the top of the multifunction lever, there’s a paddle
with the word PUSH on it. To spray washer fluid on the
windshield, push the paddle. The wipers will run for
several sweeps and then either stop or return to your
preset speed. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in
the Index.
CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
The LOW WASH light on
your instrument panel
cluster will glow when the
fluid level is low.
2-38
Cruise Control
CAUTION:
D Cruise control can be dangerous where
D
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
you can’t drive safely at a steady speed.
So, don’t use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control.
Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. (See “Traction
Control System” in the Index.) When road conditions
allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise
control back on.
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control
shuts off.
2-39
Setting Cruise Control
CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You
could be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise control switch off until you want to use
cruise control.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off
the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch from ON to R/A
(Resume/Accelerate) briefly. You’ll go right back up to
your chosen speed and stay there.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
D Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Push in the SET button at the end of the lever and
release it. The CRUISE light on the instrument panel
cluster will come on.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Push in the SET button, then release the button
and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at the
higher speed.
D Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it
there until you get up to the speed you want, and
then release the switch. (To increase your speed in
very small amounts, move the switch to R/A briefly
and then release it. Each time you do this, your
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
The accelerate feature will only work after you set
the cruise control speed by pushing the SET button.
2-40
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
D Push in the SET button until you reach the lower
D Step lightly on the brake pedal, or
D move the cruise switch to OFF.
D To slow down in very small amounts, push the SET
Erasing Cruise Speed Memory
speed you want, then release it.
button briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear
to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on
steep hills.
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, or
shift into PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), your cruise
control set speed memory is erased.
Exterior Lamps
They control these systems:
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Headlamps
Taillamps
Parking Lamps
License Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Courtesy Lamps
Fog Lamps
Cornering Lamps
2-41
The lamp controls
are located on the
instrument panel.
Daytime Running Lamps / Automatic
Headlamp Control
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the
DRL work, so be sure it isn’t covered.
The DRL system will make your front turn signal lamps
come on when:
If you pull the knob out halfway, it will turn on your
parking lamps and your other operating lamps. If you
pull the knob all the way out, your headlamps will then
come on.
D The ignition is on,
D the headlamp switch is off and
D the parking brake is released.
Push the knob in all the way to turn off the lamps.
When the DRL are on, only your front turn signal lamps
will be on. The headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker and
other lamps won’t be on. Your instrument panel won’t
be lit up either.
A warning chime will sound if you open the driver’s
door when you turn the ignition switch to OFF, LOCK
or ACCESSORY with the lamps on.
When it’s dark enough outside, your front turn signal
lamps will turn off and your vehicle’s headlamps and
parking lamps will turn on. The other lamps that come
on with your headlamps will also come on.
2-42
When it’s bright enough outside, your headlamps will go
off and your front turn signal lamps will come on.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL and automatic
headlamp control off, set the parking brake while the
ignition is in OFF or LOCK. Then start your vehicle.
The DRL, headlamps and parking lamps will stay off
until you release the parking brake.
To turn off the automatic headlamp feature when it’s
dark outside, move the exterior lamp control to the
parking lamp position. Your parking lamps will remain
illuminated and your headlamps will turn off. The fog
lamps (if equipped) will also be lit if they were on when
you switched to the parking lamp position.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Delayed Headlamp Illumination
Delayed headlamp illumination provides a period of
exterior lighting as you leave your vehicle. The feature is
activated when your vehicle’s headlamps are on due to the
automatic headlamp control feature described previously in
this section, and when your vehicle’s ignition is turned off.
Your headlamps will then remain on until the headlamp
switch is moved from OFF to the parking lamp position or
until a 90 second lighting period has ended.
If you turn off the ignition with the headlamp switch in
the parking lamp or headlamp position, the delayed
headlamp illumination cycle will not occur.
You can customize the vehicle to activate delayed
headlamp illumination when your vehicle’s ignition is
turned off under the conditions described above, or you
may choose not to activate this feature under any
conditions. You can turn the feature on and off when
you perform the following sequence:
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Press and hold the power door lock switch. While
holding the door lock switch, cycle the headlamp
switch on and then off two times.
4. Release the power door lock switch. These
operations must be carried out in a time period of
less than 10 seconds, followed by a delay period of
no more than 10 seconds.
5. Then, press and hold the power door unlock switch.
While holding the door unlock switch, turn the
headlamp switch on and then off two times. Release
the courtesy door unlock switch. These steps must be
carried out in a time period of less than 10 seconds.
2-43
After releasing the door unlock switch, a single chime
will be heard if the delayed headlamp illumination
function has been disabled; two chimes will be heard
if the feature has been enabled. Disconnecting the
vehicle’s battery for up to a year will not change the
programmed operation of this feature.
Cornering Lamps
Fog Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness Control
To turn the fog lamps on,
press the fog lamps switch
located below the headlamp
switch on the left side of the
steering column.
A light will glow on the switch to let you know that the
fog lamps are on. (Your parking lamps or low-beam
headlamps must be on or your fog lamps won’t come
on.) Press the switch again to turn the fog lamps off.
The fog lamps will go off whenever you change to
high-beam headlamps. When you return to low beams,
the fog lamps will come on again.
2-44
The cornering lamps are designed to come on when you
signal a turn. This will provide more light for cornering
at night.
Interior Lamps
You can brighten or dim the instrument panel lights by
moving the LIGHTS dial. If you turn the dial past
MAX, your courtesy or interior lamps will come on.
Courtesy Lamps
When any door is opened, several lamps come on.
These lamps are courtesy lamps. They make it easy for
you to enter and leave your vehicle. You can also turn
these lamps on by twisting or turning the interior lights
knob all the way to the right.
Illuminated Entry
Your courtesy lamps will come on and stay on for a set
time whenever you press UNLOCK on the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
If you open a door, the lamps will stay on while it’s open
and then turn off automatically about 25 seconds after
you close it. If you press UNLOCK and don’t open a
door, the lamps will turn off after about 40 seconds.
Illuminated entry includes a feature called theater
dimming. With theater dimming, the lamps don’t just
turn off at the end of the delay time. Instead, they slowly
dim after the delay time until they go out. The delay
time is canceled if you turn the ignition key to RUN or
START, so the lamps will dim right away.
When the ignition is on, illuminated entry is inactive,
which means the courtesy lamps won’t come on unless a
door is opened.
Delayed Entry Lighting
Delayed entry lighting lights your vehicle’s interior for a
period of time after all the doors have been closed.
The ignition must be off for delayed entry lighting
to work. Just after all the doors have been closed,
the delayed entry lighting feature will continue to
work until:
D The ignition is in RUN, or
D the doors are locked, or
D an illumination period of 25 seconds has elapsed.
If during the illumination period a door is opened, the
timed illumination period will be canceled and the
interior lamps will remain on since a door is open.
Delayed Exit Lighting
This feature illuminates your vehicle’s interior for a
period of time after the ignition key is removed from
the ignition.
The vehicle’s ignition must be off for delayed exit
lighting to work. When the ignition key is removed,
interior illumination will activate and remain on until:
D The ignition is in RUN, or
D the power door locks are activated, or
D an illumination period of 25 seconds has elapsed.
If during the illumination period a door is opened, the
timed illumination period will be canceled and the
interior lamps will remain on since a door is open.
Perimeter Lighting
Perimeter lighting provides a period of exterior vehicle
lighting as the driver and passengers approach the
vehicle. Perimeter lighting is only activated when the
function is enabled, the doors are closed, the ignition is
in OFF and the security feedback feature is in Mode 3
or 4. (See “Security Feedback” in the Index for more
information.) The vehicle headlamps and back-up lamps
are then activated for a period of 25 seconds or until the
ignition switch is turned to RUN.
2-45
You may enable or disable the perimeter lighting feature
when the driver performs the following sequence with
the engine not running, the doors closed:
Rearview Mirror Reading Lamps
1. Turn the ignition to RUN.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Apply your brakes.
4. Press and hold the power door lock switch.
While holding the door lock switch press and
release the remote alarm button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
This will initialize the customization mode. While in the
customization mode, the feature will sound the number
of chimes corresponding to the current mode: In Mode
1, one chime means the feature is disabled. In Mode 2,
two chimes signal that the perimeter lighting feature is
enabled. Each additional press will advance the mode by
one, starting from the current mode. During this
procedure, the feature will sound the number of chimes
corresponding to the mode. When the lock switch is
released, the vehicle will remain in the last mode.
Disconnecting the vehicle’s battery for up to a year will
not change the programmed operation of this feature.
2-46
The reading lamps are located on the underside of the
rearview mirror.
Use the switch next to each lamp to turn them on
and off.
Dome Lamp (If Equipped)
The dome lamp will come on when you open the doors.
Battery Rundown Protection
Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror
Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from
draining the battery in case you accidentally leave the
interior courtesy lamps, reading/map lamps, visor vanity
lamps, trunk lamp, underhood lamp or glove box lamps
on. If you leave any of these lamps on, they will
automatically turn off after 20 minutes, if the ignition is
in OFF. The lamps won’t come back on again until you:
To reduce glare from lamps behind you, pull the lever at
the bottom of the mirror toward you (to the night
position). To return the mirror back to the day position,
push the lever away from you.
Electrochromic Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror (If Equipped)
D turn the ignition on,
D turn the lamp switch off, then on, or
D open a door.
Note: If your vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km) on
the odometer, the battery saver will turn off the lamps
after only three minutes.
Retained Accessory Power
With retained accessory power, your power windows,
audio system and sunroof will continue to work up to
10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF and
before any of the doors are opened.
Mirrors
Adjust all the mirrors so you can see clearly when you
are sitting in a comfortable driving position.
Your vehicle may have an electrochromic day/night
rearview mirror. Push the button in the center of the
mirror to turn this feature on. The mirror will darken
gradually to reduce glare from headlamps behind you.
This may take a few moments.
The mirror’s two outer buttons operate the lights on the
bottom sides of the mirror.
2-47
One photocell on the front of the mirror senses when it
is becoming dark outside. Another photocell, facing
rearward, senses headlamps behind you. To turn the
electrochromic feature off, press the button in the center
of the mirror again.
To keep the photocells operating well, occasionally
clean them with a cotton swab and glass cleaner.
Power Outside Foldaway Mirrors
The power mirror control
switches are located near
the driver’s side window,
on the armrest.
Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your
vehicle and the area behind your vehicle.
These mirrors can also be folded rearward manually.
This feature is particularly useful in automatic car
washes and when maneuvering your vehicle in
narrow spaces.
Automatic Dimming/Heated Outside
Rearview Mirror
With this feature, the driver’s side outside mirror will
adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you. This
feature is controlled by the on and off settings on the
electrochromic automatic dimming rearview mirror.
(See “Electrochromic Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror”) earlier in this section.
The left and right outside mirrors are also heated when
you activate the rear window defogger. (See “Rear
Window Defogger” in the Index.)
To choose either the left or right outside mirror, move
the top switch from left through neutral to right. Press
any of the four buttons located below the top switch to
move the mirrors in the desired direction.
2-48
Both outside mirrors can be folded forward or
rearward. This feature is particularly useful in
automatic car washes.
Convex Outside Mirror
Storage Compartments
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
Glove Box
CAUTION:
Use the door key to lock and unlock the glove box.
To open, lift the latch.
Center Console
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The console has cupholders, a cassette tape storage area
and a coinholder. To open the console’s storage area,
press the latch located toward the front of the console lid
on the driver’s side of the vehicle and pull up.
2-49
To access the cupholders, pull on the top of the
cupholder door, located just behind the console shift
lever. Two cupholders will pop into an upright position.
Rear Storage Armrest (If Equipped)
You may also have an armrest located within the center
back seat of your vehicle. It may have a storage area and
cupholders. To open, pull up on the lever at the end of
the armrest and lift. Two cupholders will then be
accessible and you will have access to the storage
compartment area.
2-50
Trunk Convenience Net (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You’ll see it
on the back wall of the trunk.
Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can
help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or
quick starts and stops.
The net isn’t for larger, heavier loads. Store those in the
trunk as far forward as you can.
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when
you’re not using it.
Ashtrays and Lighter
The center front ashtray is located just below the
instrument panel’s comfort controls at the front of the
console, behind the front compartment storage door. To
remove the ashtray, open the storage door. Then open the
small black door, lift up on the ashtray and pull it out.
The rear ashtray is located within a small door at the rear
of the console. Push on the right side of the door. The
ashtray will then pivot to the right for usage. You can
only access the ashtray by pushing on the door’s right
side. To remove the ashtray, push down on the snuffer
located in the middle of the ashtray and lift it out.
NOTICE:
Don’t put papers and other things that burn into
your ashtrays. If you do, cigarettes or other
smoking materials could set them on fire,
causing damage.
NOTICE:
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
back away from the heating element when it’s
ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heating element.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You
can also move them from side to side. The visors also
have extenders that you can pull out for added coverage.
Visor Vanity Mirrors
Open the cover on the visor to expose the vanity mirror.
If your vehicle has the optional lighted vanity mirrors,
the lamps come on when you open the cover.
To use the lighter, just push it in all the way and let go.
When it’s ready, it will pop back by itself.
2-51
Accessory Power Outlet
NOTICE:
Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle
can damage it or keep other things from working
as they should. This wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Check with your dealer before adding
electrical equipment, and never use anything that
exceeds the fuse rating.
Auxiliary Power Connection
(Power Drop)
Your vehicle is equipped with a 12-volt outlet. It is
located on the console’s passenger’s side, near the
floor. Open the cover to use the outlet. This feature
can be used to add aftermarket electrical equipment to
your vehicle.
2-52
Your vehicle is equipped
with an auxiliary
power connection.
It is located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle,
under the glove box, and is labeled with a wire function
and fuse rating. This feature provides power, ground
and accessory wires which can be accessed to add
aftermarket electrical equipment to your vehicle. For
information on accessing the connection and electrical
hookup, please refer to your service manual. To order a
service manual, see “Service Publications, Ordering” in
the Index.
NOTICE:
Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle
can damage it or keep other things from working
as they should. This wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Check with your dealer before adding
electrical equipment, and never use anything that
exceeds the fuse rating.
OnStarR System (If Equipped)
OnStar is a vehicle communications service. The
following services are available through a subscription
with OnStar and are available 24 hours a day:
Emergency Services
D
D
D
D
D
D
Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment
Theft Notification and Stolen-Vehicle Tracking
Roadside Assistance with Location
Remote Diagnostics
OnStar MED-NET
Accident Assist
Convenience Services
D
D
D
D
Remote Door Unlock
Route Support
Concierge Services
Ride Assist
A complete user’s guide is provided with the OnStar
System. For more information contact OnStar at
1-888-ONSTAR7.
2-53
Sunroof (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an express-open
sunroof. It includes a sliding glass panel and a one-piece
sunshade. The control switch works only when the
ignition or retained accessory power is on. See
“Retained Accessory Power” in the Index. The control
switch is located overhead on the headliner.
To open the sunroof, push the rear (indented part) of
the switch once and the sunroof will open to the vent
position only. You will need to open the sunshade
by hand.
Push the rear of the switch a second time and the
sunroof and sunshade will open by themselves. This is
the express-open feature.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the front of the
switch until the sunroof motor stops. The sunshade can
only be closed by hand.
2-54
The Instrument Panel -- Your Information System
A. Lamp Controls
E. Audio System
B. Instrument Cluster
F. Climate Controls
C. Vents
G. Glove Box
D. Horn
2-55
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast
you’re going, about how much fuel is in your tank and many other things you need to drive safely and economically.
Standard Cluster United States version shown, Canada similar
2-56
Optional Cluster United States version shown, Canada similar
2-57
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your
odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven in
either miles (used in the United States) or in kilometers
(used in Canada).
zero. If the button is pressed and held for longer
than 1.5 seconds while in the odometer mode, it will
have no effect.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the
engine speed in thousands
of revolutions per minute
(rpm). (Optional cluster
tachometer shown.)
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. If you see
ERROR, you’ll know someone has probably tampered
with it and the numbers may not be accurate.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the
mileage total of the old odometer, then that will be done.
But if it can’t, then it will be set at zero and a label must
be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
Your trip odometer tells how far you have driven since
you last reset it. To set it to zero, press the button on the
right side of the instrument cluster.
Your trip/select reset switch will go back and forth
between the odometer and the trip odometer if the
button is pressed and released within 1.5 seconds. If the
button is pressed and held for longer than 1.5 seconds
while in the trip odometer mode, it will be reset to
2-58
NOTICE:
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in
the red area, or engine damage may occur.
Warning Lights, Gages
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle may also have a driver information system
that works along with the warning lights and gages. See
“Driver Information System” in the Index.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for about eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for about 20 seconds, then
it will flash for about
55 seconds.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
2-59
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The
system check includes the air bag modules, the wiring
and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more
information on the air bag system, see “Air Bag” in
the Index.
This light will come on
when you start your vehicle,
and it will flash for a few
seconds. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
2-60
CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the air bag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Charging System Light
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition, as
a check to show you it’s
working. Then it should
go out.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the charging system. It could
indicate that you have a loose accessory belt or another
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. Driving
while this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle”
in the Index.)
2-61
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake. The
light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
United States
Canada
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come on
for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN.
If the anti-lock brake system warning light stays on longer
than normal after you’ve started your engine, turn the
ignition off. Or, if the light comes on and stays on when
you’re driving, stop as soon as possible and turn the
ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the
system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again while
you’re driving, the anti-lock brake system needs service
and you don’t have anti-lock brakes. The brake pedal may
be harder to push, or it may go to the floor. It may take
longer to stop. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
2-62
Traction Control System Warning Light
D With Full-Range Traction Control equipped
vehicles, if there’s a brake system problem that is
specifically related to traction control, the traction
control system will turn off and the warning light
will come on. If your brakes begin to overheat, the
traction control system will turn off and the warning
light will come on until your brakes cool down.
D If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn off and
The traction control system warning light may come on
for the following reasons:
D If you turn the system off by pressing the traction
control button located on the black panel directly
behind your automatic transaxle shift lever, the
warning light will come on and stay on. To turn the
system back on, press the button again. The warning
light should go off. (See “Traction Control System”
in the Index for more information.)
the warning light will come on.
D With Full-Range Traction Control, if there is a base
brake problem, the system will turn off and the light
will come on.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
2-63
Traction Control System Active Light
When your traction control
system is limiting wheel
spin, this light will come on.
Slippery road conditions may exist if the traction
control system active light comes on, so adjust your
driving accordingly.
The light will stay on for a few seconds after the traction
control system stops limiting wheel spin.
Low Traction Light
This light will also come on
when the Traction Control
System is limiting wheel
spin. You may feel or hear
the system working, but this
is normal.
Slippery road conditions may exist if the low traction
light comes on, so adjust your driving accordingly.
The light will stay on for a few seconds after the traction
control system stops limiting wheel spin. See “Traction
Control System” in the Index.
The low traction light also comes on briefly when you
turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come
on then, have it fixed so it will be there to tell you when
the Traction Control System is active.
2-64
Engine Coolant Temperature Light
This light tells you that
your engine coolant has
overheated or your radiator
cooling fan is not working.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
You have a gage that
shows the engine coolant
temperature. If the gage
pointer moves into the red
area, your engine is too hot!
The light will come on briefly when your ignition is
turned on to show you that it is working.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop
your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
That reading means the same thing as the warning light.
It means that your engine coolant has overheated. If you
have been operating your vehicle under normal driving
conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
2-65
Low Coolant Warning Light
If the LOW COOLANT light comes on, your system is
low on coolant and the engine may overheat. See
“Engine Coolant” in the Index and have your vehicle
serviced as soon as you can.
The light will come on
briefly when your ignition
is turned on to show you
that it is working properly.
Low Tire Light
The low tire inflation
monitor system can
alert you to a large
change in the pressure
in one tire.
After the system has “learned” tire pressures with
properly inflated tires, the LOW TIRE light will come
on if the pressure in one tire becomes 12 psi (83 kPa)
lower than the other three tires. The low tire inflation
monitor system won’t alert you if the pressure in more
than one tire is low, if the system is not yet calibrated, or
if the vehicle is moving faster than 70 mph (110 km/h).
When the LOW TIRE light comes on, you should stop
as soon as you can and check all your tires for damage.
(If a tire is flat, see “If a Tire Goes Flat” in the Index.)
Also check the tire pressure in all four tires as soon as
you can. See “Inflation - Tire Pressure” in the Index.
The light will stay on until you turn off the ignition or
reset the system. See “Low Tire Inflation Monitor
System” in the Index.
2-66
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine Soon Light)
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light
comes on and a chime will sound to indicate that there is
a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often
will be indicated by the system before any problem is
apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist
your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
NOTICE:
Modifications made to the engine, transaxle,
exhaust or fuel system of your vehicle or the
replacement of the original tires with other than
those of the same Tire Performance Criteria
(TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls
and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON
light to come on. Modifications to these systems
could lead to costly repairs not covered by your
warranty. This may also result in a failure to pass
a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
2-67
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
D Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
D Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
D
D
D
D
Reducing vehicle speed.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
2-68
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center for service.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been
left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel
cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Are you low on fuel?
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs
As your engine starts to run out of fuel, your engine may
not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts of
air are sucked into the fuel line causing a misfire. The
system can detect this. Adding fuel should correct this
condition. Make sure to install the fuel cap properly.
See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. It will take a
few driving trips to turn the light off.
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
SERVICE ENGINE SOON light is on or not
working properly.
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration
or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go
away once the engine is warmed up.) This will be detected
by the system and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
Here are some things you need to know in order to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is designed
to evaluate critical emission control systems during
normal driving. This may take several days of routine
driving. If you have done this and your vehicle still
does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system
readiness, see your dealer or qualified service center to
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
2-69
Low Oil Pressure Warning Light
If you have a problem with
your oil, this light may stay
on after you start your
engine, or come on when
you are driving.
This indicates that oil is not going through your engine
quickly enough to keep it lubricated. The engine could
be low on oil or could have some other oil problem.
Have it fixed right away.
The oil light could also come on in the
following situations:
D The light will come on briefly when you turn on
the ignition to show you that is is working properly.
(If it doesn’t come on with the ignition on, you may
have a problem with the fuse or bulb. Have it fixed
right away.)
D Sometimes when the engine is idling at a stop, the
light may blink on and off. This is normal.
2-70
CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check you oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by
your warranty.
Low Oil Level Light
Change Oil Soon Light
Your engine is equipped
with an oil level monitoring
system. When the ignition
key is turned on, the
LOW OIL light will
come on briefly.
The CHANGE OIL SOON
light should come on briefly
as a bulb check when you
start the engine. If the
light doesn’t come on,
have it serviced.
If the light does not come on briefly, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON light comes on and stays
on after you start the engine, have the oil changed.
If the light stays on, stop the vehicle on a level surface
and turn the engine off. Check the oil level using the
engine oil dipstick. (See “Engine Oil” in the Index.)
If the light does not come on briefly, have the low oil
level sensor system repaired so it will be ready to warn
you if there’s a problem.
For additional information, see “Engine Oil, When to
Change” in the Index. To reset the Oil Life Monitor,
see “Engine Oil Life Monitor” in the Index.
The oil level monitoring system only checks oil level
during the brief period between key on and engine
crank. It does not monitor engine oil level when the
engine is running. Additionally, an oil level check is
only performed if the engine has been turned off for a
considerable period of time, allowing the oil normally in
circulation to drain back into the oil pan.
2-71
Security Light
Performance Shift Light (If Equipped)
The SECURITY light will
come on when you turn the
key to START and stay on
until the vehicle starts.
It will also flash if your ignition key is too dirty or wet
for the PASS-KeyRII system to read the resistor pellet.
See “PASS-Key II” in the Index.
If the resistor pellet is damaged or missing, the light will
come on.
Cruise Light
The CRUISE light comes
on whenever you set your
cruise control. See “Cruise
Control” in the Index.
2-72
The PERF SHIFT light
comes on when you press
the performance shift
button to indicate that your
vehicle is in performance
shifting mode.
See “Performance Shifting” in the Index.
Service Vehicle Soon Light
The SERVICE VEHICLE
SOON light will come on
if you have certain
non-emission related
vehicle problems.
These problems may not be obvious and may affect
vehicle performance or durability. Consult a qualified
dealership for necessary repairs to maintain top vehicle
performance. The light will come on briefly when your
ignition is turned on to show that it is working properly.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Fuel Gage
The LOW WASHER light
will come on when your
windshield washers are
working and the fluid
container is low.
The light will also come on briefly when your ignition is
turned on to show that it is working properly.
Door/Trunk Ajar Warning Light
The DOOR/TRUNK light
will come on if your
trunk or any door is not
completely closed.
United States
Canada
Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have
left when the ignition is on. When the indicator nears
empty, you still have a little fuel left, but you should get
more soon.
2-73
Here are four things that some owners ask about. All
these things are normal and do not indicate that anything
is wrong with the fuel gage:
Low Fuel Light
D At the gas station, the pump shuts off before the gage
reads FULL (F).
D It takes more (or less) fuel to fill up than the gage
reads. For example, the gage reads half full, but it
took more (or less) than half of the tank’s capacity
to fill it.
D The gage pointer may move while cornering, braking
or speeding up.
D The gage may not indicate EMPTY (E) when the
United States
Canada
ignition is turned off.
If your fuel is low, a circular light on your instrument
panel will come on and stay on and a chime will sound
periodically until you add fuel.
It will also come on for a few seconds when you first
turn on the ignition as a check to show you it’s working.
If it doesn’t come on then, have it fixed.
2-74
Driver Information Center (Option)
Your Driver Information Center (DIC), located below
the tachometer on the instrument panel cluster, gives
you important safety and maintenance facts. When you
turn the ignition on, the entire center lights up for just a
few seconds.
Control Buttons
3800 V6 Supercharged Engine
3800 V6 Engine
2-75
The Driver Information Center has three buttons that
control its functions.
E/M, RESET AND MODE: The English/Metric
(E/M), RESET and MODE buttons for the Driver
Information Center are located to the left of the
steering wheel, just below the instrument panel cluster.
E/M: Press this button to change the display from
English to metric units or metric to English.
RESET: Press this button for one second to reset the
mode displayed.
MODE: Press this button to change the mode
being displayed.
Modes
AVG ECON: Shows your average fuel economy since
you last reset this mode. Average fuel economy is
viewed as a long term approximation of your overall
driving and driving conditions. To learn the average fuel
economy from a new starting point, press the RESET
button while the average fuel economy is displayed in
the DIC.
INSTANTANEOUS FUEL ECONOMY: Shows your
current fuel economy. Instantaneous fuel economy varies
with your driving conditions, such as acceleration, braking
and the grade of the road being traveled. The instantaneous
fuel economy display cannot be reset, therefore the reset
button has no effect while in this mode.
OIL LIFE MONITOR: Shows an estimate of the oil’s
remaining useful life. When the oil life index is less than
10%, the CHANGE OIL SOON light will come on.
When you have the oil changed according to the
maintenance schedule (see “Maintenance Schedule” in
the Index), you will have to reset the oil life monitor.
To reset the Oil Life Monitor, see “Engine Oil Life
Monitor” in the Index.
Also, see “Engine Oil, When to Change” and
“Maintenance Schedule” in the Index.
RANGE: Shows the approximate distance you can
drive without refueling. This is based on the amount of
fuel in the tank and on the fuel economy of the most
recent 25 miles (40 km). Pressing RESET while in this
mode will have no effect.
BOOST GAGE: If you have the supercharged engine,
this gage will show the amount of boost your engine is
receiving. Pressing RESET while in this mode will have
no effect.
2-76
Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle.
Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3- 2
3- 2
3- 4
3- 8
3- 8
3- 9
3- 10
3- 10
3- 11
Comfort Controls
Dual ComforTemp Climate Control
Dual Automatic ComforTemp Climate Control
(If Equipped)
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Ventilation System
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
and Automatic Tone Control
3- 15
3- 20
3- 23
3- 24
3- 24
3- 25
3- 26
3- 26
3- 26
3- 27
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player with Automatic Tone
Control (If Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
Backglass Antenna
Diversity Antenna System (If Equipped)
3-
3-1
Comfort Controls
Dual ComforTemp Climate Control
Fan Control Knob
The left knob labeled FAN controls the fan speed selection.
If the airflow seems very low when the fan is adjusted
to the highest setting regardless of the mode setting,
your passenger compartment air filter may need to be
replaced. See “Maintenance Schedule” or “Passenger
Compartment Air Filter” in the Index.
Driver’s Temperature Lever
The lever on the left adjusts the air temperature on the
driver’s side outlets independent of the temperature set
by the passenger. Slide the lever up to raise the
temperature. Slide the lever down to lower
the temperature.
With this system, the driver and passenger can maintain
separate temperatures. The system works best if you
keep your windows closed while using it.
Passenger’s Temperature Lever
The lever on the right adjusts the air temperature on the
passenger’s side independent of the temperature set by
the driver. Slide the lever up to raise the temperature.
Slide the lever down to lower the temperature.
Mode Knob
The right knob has several settings to control the
direction of airflow. To access the various modes
available, turn the mode knob to the desired mode.
3-2
MAX: This setting recirculates much of the air inside
your vehicle and sends it through the instrument panel
outlets. The air conditioning compressor will run
automatically in this setting unless the outside
temperature is below 40_F (4_C). (Even when the
compressor is running, you can control the temperature.)
VENT: This setting brings in outside air and directs it
through the instrument panel outlets.
BI-LEV: This setting brings in outside air and directs
it two ways. Half of the air is directed through the
instrument panel outlets. Most of the remaining air is
directed through the floor ducts and a little to the defrost
and side window vents.
HTR: This setting sends most of the air through the
ducts near the floor. The rest comes out of the defroster
and side window vents.
BLEND: This setting allows half of the air to go to
the floor ducts and half to the defroster and side
window vents. The air conditioning compressor will
run automatically in this setting unless the outside
temperature is below 40_F (4_C). (Even when the
compressor is running, you can control the temperature.)
DEF: This setting directs most of the air through
the defroster and side window vents. Some of the air
goes to the floor ducts and the side window vents.
The air conditioning compressor will run automatically
in this setting unless the outside temperature is below
40_F (4_C). (Even when the compressor is running,
you can control the temperature.)
A/C: Press this button to turn the air conditioning
on and off. The system will cool and dehumidify the air
inside the vehicle when the A/C light is on.
Heating
On cold days, use HTR with the Driver and Passenger
levers all the way in the red area. This system will bring
in outside air, heat it, and send it to the floor ducts.
Heating (Engine Coolant Heater)
If your vehicle has an engine coolant heater, you can use
it to help your system provide warm air faster when it’s
cold outside -- 0_F (-18_C) or lower. An engine
coolant heater warms the coolant your engine and
heating system use to provide heat. See “Engine
Coolant Heater” in the Index.
3-3
Air Conditioning
On very hot days, open the windows long enough to
let hot, inside air escape. This reduces the time for the
vehicle to cool down.
Dual Automatic ComforTemp Climate
Control (If Equipped)
For a quick cool-down on very hot days, use MAX
with the temperature levers all the way in the blue area.
If this setting is used for long periods of time, the air in
your vehicle may become too dry.
For normal cooling on hot days, use VENT with the
temperature levers in the blue area. The system will
bring in outside air and cool it.
On cool, but sunny days, the sun may warm your upper
body, but your lower body may not be warm enough.
You can use BI-LEV and set the temperature levers to a
comfortable setting. The system will bring in outside air
and direct it to your upper body, while sending slightly
warmed air to your lower body. You may notice this
temperature difference more at some times than others.
Push the A/C button on for cooling.
3-4
With this system, you set a temperature. You can then
either let the system automatically control airflow
direction and force to maintain the temperature, or you
can manually adjust it. The system works best if you
keep your windows closed while using it.
Automatic Control
For the most efficient operation, you should set the
system temperature and press AUTO. The system will
select the best fan speed and airflow settings to keep you
comfortable. The air conditioning compressor will run if
the outside temperature is above 40_F (4_C). You may
notice a delay of two to three minutes before the fan
comes on at start up in cool weather.
Temperature Control
The TEMP switch sets the temperature for the entire
system when the light on the DUAL button isn’t lit.
If the DUAL button light is lit, this master temperature
control sets the temperature for the driver only. Press the
up arrow to raise the temperature and press the down
arrow to lower the temperature. The display will show
your selection for a few seconds, then the outside
temperature will be displayed. If you push the AUTO
button, the system will control the fan speed and airflow.
The driver’s temperature and passenger’s temperature
settings will be automatically maintained even if manual
overrides have been selected except for settings at 60_F
(15_C) and 90_F (32_C).
Setting the temperature to 90_F (32_C) will lock control
in full hot, direct air to the floor, and increase the fan speed
to high. The system will not return to automatic temperature
control until the temperature setting is lowered.
Setting the temperature to 60_F (15_C) will lock control
in full cold, recirculate interior air, direct air to outlets
on panel and increase blower speed to high. The system
will not return to automatic temperature control until the
temperature setting is raised.
Passenger’s Temperature Control
The PASSENGER CONTROL buttons with the arrows
adjust the temperature on the passenger’s side so it is
warmer or cooler than the temperature for the driver’s
side. Push the DUAL button so that the indicator light is
lit. Press the right arrow button to raise the temperature.
Press the left arrow button to lower the temperature.
The display will not show the passenger’s temperature,
only that of the driver. Indicators in the passenger
control section will show passenger’s side temperature
relative to the driver’s set temperature.
D The amber light indicates the same temperature as
set for the driver.
D The red lights indicate a warmer temperature than
that of the driver.
D The blue lights indicate a cooler temperature than
that of the driver.
3-5
Hot Weather Example: When you start the vehicle in
hot weather, 80_F (27_C), or after being parked during
the day in full sun, if your driver set temperature is 75_F
(24_C) and you are in full automatic mode, the system
will automatically move the temperature to full cold.
The fan will be at low speed momentarily and then go
to the high speed. The air intake will be recirculated for
maximum cooling performance. As the interior of the
vehicle cools down to your desired comfort point, the fan
speed will decrease and the temperature will move to a
warmer position to maintain your desired comfort. As the
interior cools down or the sun load decreases the system
could switch to air delivered to A/C vents and the floor.
Cold Weather Example: When you start the vehicle in
cold weather, (below freezing) or after being parked
overnight. If your Driver Set Temperature is 75_F (24_C)
and you are in Full Automatic mode, the system will
automatically move the temperature doors to full hot. The fan
will start out at a low speed and will increase to a higher
speed as the engine warms up. The air will be delivered to
the floor. As the the interior of the vehicle warms up to your
desired comfort point, the fan speed will decrease and the
temperature will move to a cooler position to maintain your
desired comfort. As the cabin warms up or the sun load
increases the system could switch to air delivered to the
windshield and the floor (DEFOG mode).
3-6
Manual Control
If you prefer to manually control the heating, cooling and
ventilation in your vehicle, you can select airflow direction,
fan speed, outside or recirculated air, air compressor and
temperature operation with the following buttons:
AIR FLOW: This control has several settings to control
the direction of airflow when the system is not in AUTO.
To access the various modes available, continue to press
the AIR FLOW rocker button up or down until the
desired mode appears in the display:
D WINDSHIELD/FLOOR: This setting directs half
of the air to the floor ducts and half to the defroster
and side window vents. The air conditioning
compressor will run automatically in this setting
unless the outside temperature is below 40_F (4_C).
D MID/FLOOR: This setting directs half of the air
through the instrument panel outlets. Most of the
remaining air is directed through the floor ducts and
a little to the defroster and side window vents.
D MID: This setting directs air through the instrument
panel outlets.
D FLOOR: This setting sends most of the air through
the ducts near the floor. The rest comes out of the
defroster and side window vents. When in this
setting and the RECIRC setting, the windows can
fog up. See “RECIRC” in the Index.
FRONT: This setting brings in outside air and
directs most of the air through the defrost vent. Some of
the air also goes to the floor ducts and the side window
defogger outlets. The indicator on the button will light
and WINDSHIELD will be lit in the display. The air
conditioning compressor will run automatically in this
setting unless the outside temperature is below
40_F (4_C).
VENT: This pushbutton turns the air conditioning
compressor on and off. The indicator is lit when the
compressor is turned off. Recirculation is not permitted
when the compressor is off. The system will try to
control the temperature automatically, but without
the compressor.
VENT is not permitted in FRONT defrost mode. If the
VENT button is pushed while in FRONT defrost mode,
the indicator will light for one second and then turn off.
RECIRC: This setting recirculates much of the air
inside your vehicle. This setting is not permitted in
FRONT defrost mode and is only permitted in
WINDSHIELD/FLOOR mode if the compressor
is turned on. The indicator light will be lit when
recirculation is engaged, but will light for one second
and then turn off if selected when not permitted.
Operating the climate control system in the RECIRC
mode may cause fogging of the vehicles windows when
the weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog, switch
the system to either WINDSHIELD/FLOOR or
WINDSHIELD mode and increase the fan speed.
To avoid re-fogging of the windows, operate the
system with RECIRC disengaged.
3-7
Defogging and Defrosting
D If you have the DUAL COMFORTEMP CLIMATE
Rear Window Defogger
CONTROL, your system has two settings for
clearing the front and side windows. To defrost the
windows quickly, press the DEF button with the
temperature knob all the way in the red area.
For maximum defroster performance, set both
driver and passenger temperature controls to the
warmest setting.
To warm passengers while keeping the windows
clear, use BLEND.
D If you have the DUAL AUTOMATIC
COMFORTEMP CLIMATE CONTROL, your
system has two settings for clearing the front and
side windows. To defrost the windows quickly, press
the FRONT button; set the temperature to 90 _F
(32_C), select high fan speed and turn the DUAL
button off. To warm passengers while keeping the
windows clear, push the AIR FLOW button until
WINDSHIELD/FLOOR appears in the display.
Select fan speed for comfort and windshield
clearing performance.
3-8
Dual ComforTemp
Climate Control
Dual Automatic
ComforTemp
Climate Control
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window. Press the button to
turn the rear defogger on. It will turn itself off after
about 15 minutes. If you turn it on again, the rear
defogger will only run for about 7.5 minutes before
turning off. You can also turn it off by pressing the
button again.
NOTICE:
Do not attach anything like a temporary vehicle
license or decal across the defogger grid.
Ventilation System
Adjust the direction
of airflow by moving
the vents.
NOTICE:
Don’t use a razor blade or anything else sharp on
the inside of the rear window. If you do, you
could cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies
outside air into the vehicle when it is moving. Outside
air will also enter the vehicle when the air conditioning
fan is running.
If the airflow seems very low when the fan is adjusted
to the highest setting regardless of the mode setting,
your passenger compartment air filter may need to be
replaced. See “Maintenance Schedule” or “Passenger
Compartment Air Filter” in the Index.
3-9
Ventilation Tips
D Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction, such as leaves. The heater and
defroster will work far better, reducing the chance of
fogging the inside of your windows.
D When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, adjust the
mode knob or button to FLOOR and the fan to the
highest speed for a few seconds before driving off.
This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and
moisture and reduces the chance of fogging the
inside of your windows.
D Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
D For mild outside temperatures when little heating or
cooling is needed, use VENT to direct outside air
through your vehicle.
3-10
Audio Systems
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and give years of listening pleasure. You will get the
most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it
first. Find out what your audio system can do and how
to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the
most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
Setting the Clock
Press and hold HRS until the correct hour appears. Press
and hold MIN until the correct minute appears.
You may set the clock with the ignition off if you
press RECALL first and follow the same procedure
described above.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
and Automatic Tone Control
RECALL: Press this button briefly to recall the station
being played or to display the clock. To change what is
normally shown on the display (station or time), press
this button until you see the display you want, then hold
the button until the display flashes. If you press the
button when the ignition is off, the clock will show for a
few seconds.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Press the up or down arrow to choose
radio stations.
SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next
higher or lower station and stay there. The sound will
mute while seeking.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a MonsoonR sound
system, which includes eight speakers and a powerful
eight channel, 200 watt amplifier.
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: Press this knob to turn the system on
and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease the volume.
SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds
and SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to
a station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press one of the SEEK buttons again to stop
scanning. The sound will mute while scanning.
3-11
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
3. Tune in the desired station.
AUTO SET: Press this button and the system will seek
and set the 12 strongest FM or the 6 strongest AM
stations on your preset buttons (depending on which
band (AM or FM) you are listening to). AUTO SET will
flash while seeking and will remain on until this
function is complete. To return to the stations you
manually set, press AUTO SET again.
4. Press TONE to select the setting you prefer.
Setting the Tone
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons. The
sound will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the tone you selected
will be automatically selected for that button.
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to increase or decrease bass.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
P SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of your
preset stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to
the first preset station, stop for a few seconds, then go
on to the next preset station. Press P SCAN again to stop
scanning. If a preset station has weak reception, the
radio will not stop at the preset station.
3-12
TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to increase or decrease treble. If a station is weak
or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset bass
and treble equalization settings designed for classical, pop,
rock, jazz, talk and country/western stations. CLASS will
appear on the display when you first press TONE. Each time
you press it, another setting will appear on the display. Press
it again after C & W appears and MANUAL will appear.
Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB knobs. Also,
if you use the BASS and TREB knobs, control will return to
them and MANUAL will appear.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers.
The middle position balances the sound between
the speakers.
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers.
The middle position balances the sound between
the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Cassette Tape
The longer side with the tape visible should face to the
right. If the ignition and the radio are on, the tape can be
inserted and will begin playing. If you hear nothing or
hear a garbled sound, the tape may not be in squarely.
Press EJECT to remove the tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOLUME, FADE,
BAL, BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the
radio. Other controls may have different functions when
a tape is inserted. The display will show an arrow to
show which side of the tape is playing.
If you want to insert a tape when the ignition or radio is
off, first press EJECT or RECALL. Note that the
cassette tape adapter kits for portable compact disc
players will work in your cassette tape player.
Your tape bias is set automatically.
If E and a number appear on the radio display, the tape
won’t play because of an error.
D E10: The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the
open end down and try to turn the right hub
counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over
and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your tape
may be damaged and should not be used in the
player. Try a new tape to make sure your player is
working properly.
D E11: The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio
displays an error number, write it down and provide it to
your dealer when reporting the problem.
PREV (1): Press this button to search for the previous
selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for PREV to
work. The sound will mute while seeking.
3-13
NEXT (2): Press this button to search for the next
selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for NEXT to
work. The sound will mute while seeking.
The SEEK up and down arrows will also find the
previous and next selections on the tape.
AA (3): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will
play while the tape reverses.
"" (4): Press this button to advance quickly to another
part of the tape. Press the button again to return to playing
speed. The radio will play while the tape advances.
SIDE (5): Press this button to change the side of the
tape that is playing.
D
(6): Press this button to reduce background noise.
The double-D symbol will appear on the display.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
3-14
AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a tape
is in the player.
SOURCE: Press this button to change to the tape
function when the radio is on. TAPE PLAY with an
arrow will appear on the display when the tape is active.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio
will play.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player with Automatic Tone
Control (If Equipped)
RECALL: Press this button briefly to recall the station
being played or to display the clock. To change what is
normally shown on the display (station or time), press
the RECALL button until you see the display you want,
then hold the RECALL button until the display flashes.
If you press the button when the ignition is off, the clock
will show for a few seconds.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Press the up or down arrow to choose
radio stations.
SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next
higher or lower station and stay there. The sound will
mute while seeking.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a MonsoonR sound
system, which includes eight speakers and a powerful
eight channel, 200 watt amplifier.
Playing the Radio
SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds
and SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to
a station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop
scanning. The sound will mute while scanning.
VOLUME: Press this knob to turn the system on
and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
3-15
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
AUTO SET: Press this button and the system will seek
and set the 12 strongest FM or the 6 strongest AM
stations on your preset buttons. AUTO SET will flash
while seeking and will remain on until this function is
complete. To return to the stations you manually set,
press AUTO SET again.
3. Tune in the desired station.
Setting the Tone
4. Press TONE to select the setting you prefer.
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to increase or decrease bass.
1. Turn the radio on.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons. The
sound will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the tone you selected
will be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of your
preset stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to
the first preset station, stop for a few seconds, then go
on to the next preset station. Press P SCAN again to
stop scanning. If a preset station has weak reception,
the radio will not stop at the preset station.
3-16
TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to increase or decrease treble. If a station is weak
or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset bass
and treble equalization settings designed for classical,
pop, rock, jazz, talk and country/western stations.
CLASS will appear on the display when you first press
TONE. Each time you press it, another setting will
appear on the display. Press it again after C & W
appears and MANUAL will appear. Tone control will
return to the BASS and TREB knobs. Also, if you use
the BASS and TREB knobs, control will return to them
and MANUAL will appear.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob
to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The
middle position balances the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Cassette Tape
The longer side with the tape visible should face to the
right. If the ignition and the radio are on, the tape can be
inserted and will begin playing. If you hear nothing or
hear a garbled sound, the tape may not be in squarely.
Press EJECT to remove the tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOLUME, FADE,
BAL, BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the
radio. Other controls may have different functions when
a tape is inserted. The display will show an arrow to
show which side of the tape is playing.
If you want to insert a tape when the ignition or radio is
off, first press EJECT or RECALL.
Your tape bias is set automatically.
If E and a number appear on the radio display, the tape
won’t play because of an error.
D E10: The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the
open end down and try to turn the right hub
counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over
and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your tape
may be damaged and should not be used in the
player. Try a new tape to make sure your player is
working properly.
D E11: The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio
displays an error number, write it down and provide it to
your dealer when reporting the problem.
PREV (1): Press this button to search for the previous
selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for PREV to
work. The sound will mute while seeking.
NEXT (2): Press this button to search for the next
selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for NEXT to
work. The sound will mute while seeking.
The SEEK down and up arrows will also find the
previous and next selections on the tape.
3-17
AA (3): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will
play while the tape reverses.
"" (4): Press this button to advance quickly to another
part of the tape. Press the button again to return to playing
speed. The radio will play while the tape advances.
SIDE (5): Press this button to change the side of the
tape that is playing.
RAND (6): Press this button to reduce background
noise. The double-D symbol will appear in the display.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
SOURCE: Press this button to change to the tape or
disc function when the radio is on. If both a tape and a
disc are installed, the system will first go to tape play;
TAPE SIDE and an arrow will appear on the display. If
SOURCE is pressed again, the system will go to disc
play; CD PLAY will appear on the display.
3-18
EJECT: The system has two EJECT buttons. Press the
button near the CD slot to remove a disc. Press the
button near the tape slot to remove a tape and the radio
will play.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.
Your cassette tape player automatically reduces
background noise from tapes encoded with Dolby NR.
You may turn Dolby NR off by pressing the number
six preset.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. The disc should begin playing.
If you want to insert a CD while the ignition or the radio
is off, first press EJECT or RECALL.
NEXT (2): Press this button to go to the next track.
If you hold the button or press it more than once, the
player will continue moving forward through the disc.
The sound will mute while seeking.
The SEEK down and up arrows will also find the
previous and next selections on the disc.
If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot,
the disc may not play and an error code may appear on
the display. When the road becomes smooth or the
temperature returns to normal, the disc should play.
If the disc comes out, it could be that:
AA (3): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track. You will hear sound.
D E20: The disc is upside down.
D E20: It is dirty, scratched or wet.
D E20: There’s too much moisture in the air.
RAND (6): Press this button to hear the tracks in
random, rather than sequential, order. Press RAND
again to turn off random play.
(Wait about an hour and try again.)
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio
displays an error number, write it down and provide it
to your dealer when reporting the problem.
PREV (1): Press this button to go to the start of the
current track, if more than eight seconds have played.
If you hold the button or press it more than once, the
player will continue moving back through the disc.
The sound will mute while seeking.
"" (4): Press and hold this button to quickly advance
within a track. You will hear sound.
RECALL: Press this button to see which track is
playing. Press it again within five seconds to see how
long it has been playing. To change what is normally
shown on the display (track or elapsed time), press the
RECALL button until you see the display you want,
then hold the RECALL button until the display flashes.
AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc
is in the player.
3-19
SOURCE: Press this button to change to the disc function
when the radio is on. When a disc is inserted, the disc will
play until you press AM-FM. Then the disc will stop
playing and the radio will play. Press SOURCE again to
play a disc again. CD PLAY will show on the display.
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power is removed. If your battery loses power for any
reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret code
before it will operate.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the disc. The radio
will play.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a disc in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or system, the disc will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
Also, as a protection feature, if a CD is ejected and left
in the player, it will be pulled back in the player with the
ignition on or off.
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCKR is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed.
If THEFTLOCK is active, the THEFTLOCK indicator
will flash when the ignition is off.
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
3-20
The instructions which follow explain how to enter your
secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is
recommended that you read through all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between
any steps, the radio automatically reverts to time and
you must start the procedure over at Step 4.
1. Write down any three or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from
the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
3. Turn the radio off.
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the
secret code number which you have written down.
5. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.
6. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
4. Press HRS to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press HRS to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is
now operable and secure.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show REP to let you know that you
need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code.
9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radio is secure.
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
with the ignition on before you can try again. When
you try again, you will only have three more chances
(eight tries per chance) to enter the correct code before
INOP appears.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
1. Turn the ignition on. LOC will appear on the display.
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
2. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
3. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until SEC shows on the display.
3-21
4. Press MIN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MIN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
6. Press HRS to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show ---, indicating that the radio
is no longer secured.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain
radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel.
SEEK: Press the up
or down arrow to tune to
the next or previous
radio station.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery power is removed and later applied to a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will
appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier
in this section.
3-22
If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing, the player
will advance to the next or previous selection.
SCAN: Press the SCAN button and SCAN will appear
on the display. SCAN works as the PSCAN button on
your radio. It will scan through each of the preset radio
stations. If a preset radio station has weak reception, the
radio will not stop at the preset station. Press SCAN
again to stop scanning.
AM-FM: Press this button to choose AM, FM1 or FM2.
If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing, press this
button to stop it and the radio will play.
SRCE: Press this button to
change to the cassette tape,
compact disc function or
return to playing the radio.
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM Stereo
MUTE: Press this button to silence the audio system.
Press it again to turn on the sound.
VOL: Press the up or down arrow to increase or
decrease volume.
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go. If your vehicle is equipped
with the diversity antenna system, the interference may
be reduced.
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be
loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
3-23
To help avoid hearing loss or damage:
D Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
D Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio -- be sure you
can add what you want. If you can, it’s very
important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, Delphi Delco Electronics
radio or other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been
added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
3-24
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate
that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on
the display, your cassette tape player needs to be
cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as
soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and
player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a
known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape
player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement
in sound quality, clean the tape player.
The recommended cleaning method for your
cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789).
When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because
your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature
and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape.
If the cleaning cassette ejects, insert the cassette at least
three times to ensure thorough cleaning.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
3-25
Backglass Antenna
Your AM-FM antenna is integrated with your rear
window defogger, located in the rear window. Be sure
that the inside surface of the rear window is not
scratched and that the lines on the glass are not
damaged. If the inside surface is damaged, it could
interfere with radio reception. Also, for proper radio
reception, the antenna connector at the top-center of the
rear window needs to be properly attached to the post on
the glass.
NOTICE:
Do not try to clear frost or other material from
the inside of the rear window with a razor blade
or anything else that is sharp. This may damage
the rear defogger grid and affect your radio’s
ability to pick up stations clearly. The repairs
wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
3-26
Because this antenna is built into your rear window,
there is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes
and vandals.
If you choose to add a cellular telephone to your vehicle,
and the antenna needs to be attached to the glass, be sure
that you do not damage the grid lines for the AM-FM
antenna. There is enough space between the lines to
attach a cellular telephone antenna without interfering
with radio reception.
On cars equipped with the rear window defogger and
built-in antenna, the defogger grid serves as a radio
antenna. Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting to the
back glass. The metallic film in some tinting materials
will interfere with or distort the incoming radio
reception. Care must be taken when cleaning the rear
window because breaks in the resistive material heating
element will adversely affect radio performance and
defogger performance. See your dealer for details.
Diversity Antenna System (If Equipped)
Your AM-FM antennas are located in the front
windshield and rear window. Be sure that the inside
surfaces of the front windshield and rear window are not
scratched and that the lines on the glass are not
damaged. If the inside surfaces are damaged, they could
interfere with radio reception. Also, for proper radio
reception, the antenna connector at the top-center of the
front windshield and the antenna connector at the
top-center of the rear window need to be properly
attached to the posts on the glass.
If, when you turn on your rear window defogger, you
hear static on your radio station, it could mean that a
defogger grid line has been damaged. If this is true, the
grid line must be repaired.
If you choose to add an aftermarket cellular telephone to
your vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to the
glass, be sure that you do not damage the grid lines for
the AM-FM antennas or place the cellular telephone
antenna over the grid lines.
NOTICE:
Do not try to clear frost or other material from
the inside of the rear window with a razor blade
or anything else that is sharp. This may damage
the rear defogger grid and affect your radio’s
ability to pick up stations clearly. The repairs
wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
3-27
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-3
4-6
4-6
4-12
4-14
4-14
4-15
4-17
4-19
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
4-22
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-25
4-27
4-31
4-31
4-33
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
4-
4-1
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)
4-2
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task -- such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor -- makes proper defensive driving more
difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or
pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving techniques could save
your life.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if
the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
Drunken Driving
D
D
D
D
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, over 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s
against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
D The amount of alcohol consumed
D The drinker’s body weight
D The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
D The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
4-3
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all
commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinking will have a
somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
a lower relative percentage of body water than men.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of
many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night.
All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being in
a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a
BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC
level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of
having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the
chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times
greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is
25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even
fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you’re with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up
your foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second.
But that’s only an average. It might be less with one
driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control of
your vehicle. (Also see “Traction Control System” and
“Full-Range Traction Control System” in the Index.)
4-6
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to
cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out
much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you
keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following
distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary
braking. That means better braking and longer
brake life.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive
away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that your
brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
United States
Canada
If there’s a problem with the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will stay on. See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in the Index.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster
than any driver could. The computer is programmed to
make the most of available tire and road conditions.
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in
front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each wheel.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
4-8
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front
of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes if that
vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room
up ahead to stop, even though you have anti-lock brakes.
This light will come on
when your traction control
system is limiting wheel
spin. See “Traction Control
System Active Light” in
the Index.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel a
slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise, but
this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
Full-Range Traction Control System
(With 3800 Supercharged V6 Engine)
Your vehicle has a Full Range Traction Control System
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning
or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system works the front brakes and reduces engine power
to limit wheel spin.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control
system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will
automatically disengage. When road conditions allow you
to safely use it again, you may reengage the cruise control.
(See “Cruise Control” in the Index.)
This light should come
on briefly when you start
the engine. If it stays on
or comes on while you
are driving, there’s a
problem with your
traction control system.
See “Traction Control System Warning Light” in the
Index. When this warning light is on, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
4-9
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to. (You
should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck
in sand, mud, ice or snow. See “Rocking Your Vehicle”
in the Index.)
To turn the system off,
press the TRACTION
button on the black panel
located directly behind
your automatic transaxle
shift lever.
Traction Control System
(3800 V6 Engine)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Traction Control System
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning
or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system reduces engine power and may also upshift the
transaxle to limit wheel spin.
This light will come on
when your Traction Control
System is limiting wheel
spin. See “Traction Control
System Active Light” in
the Index.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal.
The traction control system warning light will come on
and stay on.
You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing
the button again. The traction control system warning
light should go off.
4-10
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
reengage the cruise control. (See “Cruise Control” in
the Index.)
The Traction Control System operates in all transaxle
shift lever positions. But the system can upshift the
transaxle only as high as the shift lever position you’ve
chosen, so you should use the lower gears only when
necessary. See “Automatic Transaxle” in the Index.
When the system is on,
this warning light will
come on to let you know
if there’s a problem.
See “Traction Control System Warning Light” in the
Index. When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, you should always leave the Traction
Control System on. But you can turn the system off
if you ever need to. (You should turn the system off if
your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow.
See “Rocking Your Vehicle” in the Index.)
To turn the system on or
off, press the traction
button on the black panel
located directly behind
your automatic transaxle
shift lever.
When you turn the system off, the Traction Control
System warning light will come on and stay on. If the
Traction Control System is limiting wheel spin when
you press the button to turn the system off, the
warning light will come on and the system will turn
off right away.
You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing
the button again. The Traction Control System warning
light should go off.
4-11
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Magnetic Variable Effort Steering
This steering system provides lighter steering effort for
parking and when driving at low speeds. Steering effort
will increase at higher speeds for improved road feel.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
4-12
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and
acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet
the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control. Refer to
“Full Range Traction Control System” or “Traction
Control System” in the Index.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it
to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through
the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action -- steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to
remove as much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-13
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
D “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to
crossroads for situations that might affect your passing
patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about
making a successful pass, wait for a better time.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so
that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You
can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until the
right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
4-14
D Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken
center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
D Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass
while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
following too closely reduces your area of vision,
especially if you’re following a larger vehicle.
Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
D When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
D If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
D Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)
D Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
D Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
D If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and
constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
4-15
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by
not “overdriving” those conditions. But skids are
always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the
vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
4-16
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower
gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Driving at Night
Here are some tips on night driving.
D Drive defensively.
D Don’t drink and drive.
D Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
D Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
D Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
D In remote areas, watch for animals.
D If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-17
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you
are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn’t
lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed
headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly
into the approaching headlamps.
4-18
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and
aren’t even aware of it.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank
filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start
to separate from the inserts.
4-19
CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
4-20
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or
standing water, water can come in through your
engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can be
carried away. As little as six inches of flowing
water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants could
drown. Don’t ignore police warning signs, and
otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
D Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
D Have good tires with proper tread depth.
(See “Tires” in the Index.)
4-21
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
D Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
D Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
D Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light
is there because the corner is busy enough to need it.
When a light turns green, and just before you start
to move, check both ways for vehicles that have
not cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
4-22
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to
the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,
do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
4-23
The exit speed is usually posted.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.
D Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you
can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
Buick dealerships all across North America. They’ll be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
4-24
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
D Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
D Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
D Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
D Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
D Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?
D Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the
road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
D Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
D Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to
the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
D If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service
or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-25
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
CAUTION:
D Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with
the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will
have to do all the work of slowing down. They
could get so hot that they wouldn’t work well.
You would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always have
your engine running and your vehicle in gear
when you go downhill.
and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and transaxle.
These parts can work hard on mountain roads.
D Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
CAUTION:
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get so
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let your engine
assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope.
D Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
D
D
D
4-26
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transaxle, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be
something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades, passing
or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
D Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
D You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will
be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
4-27
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32_F; 0_C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution. Accelerate gently.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate
too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
If you have the Full Range Traction Control System or
the Traction Control System, keep the system on. It will
improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a
slippery road. Even though your vehicle has a traction
control system, you’ll want to slow down and adjust
your driving to the road conditions. See “Full Range
Traction Control System” or “Traction Control System”
in the Index.
4-28
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
D Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
D Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may
remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If
you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and
your passengers safe:
D Turn on your hazard flashers.
4-29
D Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
D Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-30
CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill
you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on
with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
Loading Your Vehicle
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
NOTICE:
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground will damage drivetrain components.
Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it
may properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information label
is inside the trunk lid. The label tells you the proper size,
speed rating and recommended inflation pressures for
the tires on your vehicle. It also gives you important
information about the number of people that can be in
your vehicle and the total weight you can carry. This
weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes
the weight of all occupants, cargo and all
nonfactory-installed options.
4-31
CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life
of your vehicle.
The other label is the Certification label, found on the rear
edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed the
GVWR for your vehicle or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
If you do have a heavy load, spread it out. Don’t carry
more than 167 lbs. (75 kg) in your trunk.
4-32
NOTICE:
Your warranty does not cover parts or
components that fail because of overloading.
If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases,
tools, packages or anything else -- they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or
if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in
a crash.
D Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
D Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
D Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
D When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
D Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you
need to.
Towing a Trailer
CAUTION:
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the
brakes may not work well -- or even at all. You
and your passengers could be seriously injured.
You may also damage your vehicle; the resulting
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the
steps in this section. Ask your dealer for advice
and information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
4-33
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what the
vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer”
that appears later in this section. But trailering is
different than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, durability and
fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct
equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine is
required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under
greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more, the
trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing
the pulling requirements.
4-34
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
D There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincial police.
D Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
D Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
D Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
D Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers (or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h)) to
save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
D the weight of the trailer,
D the weight of the trailer tongue
D and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and
how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. And, it can also depend on any special
equipment that you have on your vehicle.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Buick Customer Relations Center
P.O. Box 5039
Troy, MI 48007-5039
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total or gross
weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be
riding in the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must
add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle
will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index for more information about your
vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
4-35
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B). If you have a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B).
Hitches
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them
right simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
D The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
D Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label (found inside the trunk
lid) or see “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. Then be
sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer tongue.
4-36
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a
few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do,
then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your
vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index).
Dirt and water can, too.
Safety Chains
Driving with a Trailer
You should always attach chains between your vehicle and
your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of
the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about
safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough slack
so you can turn with your rig. And, never allow safety
chains to drag on the ground.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you
are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Trailer Brakes
Because you have anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap
into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brake
systems won’t work well, or at all.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
4-37
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good
deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that
hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move
your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and,
if possible, have someone guide you.
4-38
Making Turns
NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider
turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t
strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other
objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well
in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a different
turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check with your
dealer. The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly
hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other
drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are
seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important to check
occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Parking on Hills
CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People can
be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
If you are towing a trailer, you may want to drive in
THIRD (3) instead of OVERDRIVE ( ) (or, as you
need to, a lower gear).
B
2. Have someone place chocks under the
trailer’s wheels.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking
brake, and shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-39
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
D Start your engine;
D Shift into a gear; and
D Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake system.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index
will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s
a good idea to review this information before you start
your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See “Engine Overheating”
in the Index.
4-40
Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-8
5-9
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
5-12
5-20
5-21
5-32
5-33
Cooling System
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
Compact Spare Tire
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
5-
5-1
Hazard Warning Flashers
Press the switch located on
top of the steering column
to make your front and rear
turn signal lamps flash on
and off.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in; they even work if the key isn’t
in the ignition.
To turn off the flashers, press the switch again. When
the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn signals
won’t work.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
5-2
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. But please use the following steps listed below
to do it safely.
If your vehicle has a dead battery or a battery with low
voltage, there are two override access slots that will
allow you to override the park lock system. See “Shift
Lock Release” in the Index.
CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
D They contain acid that can burn you.
D They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
D They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage
to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
The ACDelcoR battery in your vehicle has a
built-in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or
jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks
clear or light yellow. Replace the battery when
there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a
cranking complaint.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling
it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
NOTICE:
If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
5-3
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put your
automatic transaxle in PARK (P) before setting
the parking brake.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or accessory power outlet. Turn off all lamps
that aren’t needed as well as radios. This will avoid
sparks and help save both batteries. In addition, it
could save your radio!
5-4
NOTICE:
If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries.
(Your vehicle’s battery is located toward the front
of the passenger’s side of the engine, under a
diagonal brace.)
CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
CAUTION:
5. Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on
each battery. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+)
jump starting terminal. The terminal is on the same
side of the engine compartment as your battery. To
uncover the remote positive (+) terminal, squeeze the
sides of the red plastic cap and pull the cap upward.
You should always use the remote positive (+)
terminal instead of the positive (+) terminal on
your battery.
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t
need to add water to the ACDelcoR battery
installed in every new GM vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is
there. If it is low, add water to take care of that
first. If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
5-5
6. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) and negative (-) will go to negative (-)
or a heavy, unpainted metal engine part. Don’t
connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you’ll get a
short that would damage the battery and maybe other
parts too.
CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
5-6
7. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of
the vehicle with the dead
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
8. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
9. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
Don’t let the other end
touch anything until the
next step. The other
end of the negative (-)
cable doesn’t go to the
dead battery.
It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal part on the
engine of the vehicle with the dead battery.
10. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away
from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that
move. The electrical connection is just as good
there, but the chance of sparks getting back to the
battery is much less.
11. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
12. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
13. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent
electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch
each other or any other metal.
14. Be sure to reinstall the remote positive (+) jump
starting terminal plastic cap on your vehicle.
5-7
Towing Your Vehicle
CAUTION:
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
To help avoid serious personal injury to you
or others:
D Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is
being towed.
D Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.
D Never tow with damaged parts not
fully secured.
D Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by the tow truck.
D Always secure the vehicle on each side with
separate safety chains when towing it.
D Use only the correct hooks.
NOTICE:
Use the proper towing equipment to avoid
damage to the bumper, fascia or fog lamp areas
of the vehicle.
5-8
With current trends in automotive styles and design, it is
essential that the correct towing equipment is used to
tow a vehicle. Your vehicle can be towed with wheel-lift
or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping may be
required for car-carrier equipment. Don’t have your
vehicle towed on the drive wheels, unless you must.
If the vehicle must be towed on the drive wheels,
do not tow the vehicle more than 500 cumulative miles
(800 km) or exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If these
limitations must be exceeded, then the drive wheels
have to be supported on a dolly.
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your vehicle towed. See “Roadside
Assistance” in the Index.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage and a hot
engine warning light on your instrument panel. See
“Engine Coolant Temperature Gage” and “Engine
Coolant Temperature Warning Light” in the Index.
You also have a LOW COOLANT warning light on
your instrument panel. See “Low Coolant Warning
Light” in the Index.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to
be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
Should an overheated engine condition exist, an
overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups
of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a significant loss in power and engine
performance. The low coolant light may come on and
the temperature gage will indicate an overheat condition
exists. Towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode
should be avoided.
NOTICE:
After driving in the overheated engine protection
operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow
the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair
the cause of coolant loss and change the oil.
See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
5-9
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool. See “Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.
5-10
NOTICE:
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:
D
D
D
D
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE ( ).
B
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can
drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while you’re parked. If you still have the
warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of
the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” listed previously in
this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-11
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Coolant Recovery Tank
5-12
When the engine is cold,
the coolant level should be
at or above the COLD mark
on the coolant recovery
tank. If it isn’t, you may
have a leak in the radiator
hoses, heater hoses,
radiator, water pump or
somewhere else in the
cooling system.
CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you
use only DEX-COOLR (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the
use of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.
5-13
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
NOTICE:
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOLR engine coolant at the
coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine Coolant” in the
Index for more information.)
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOLR coolant.
5-14
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
COLD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.
CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap -- even a little -- they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to
turn the pressure cap.
5-15
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
2. Then keep turning
the pressure cap, but
now push down as
you turn it. Remove
the pressure cap.
NOTICE:
Your engine has a specific radiator fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedure could cause your
engine to overheat and be severely damaged.
1. You can remove the
radiator pressure cap
when the cooling
system, including the
radiator pressure cap
and upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot. Turn
the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise until it
first stops. (Don’t press
down while turning the
pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
5-16
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
3. Remove the 3800 Series II V6 engine cover shield to
access the bleed valve.
A. Clean the area around the engine oil fill tube and
cap before removing. Twist the oil fill tube, with
cap attached, counterclockwise and remove it.
B. If you have the supercharged engine, remove the
nut in the center of the cover shield.
C. Lift the engine cover shield at the front, slide the
catch tab out of the engine bracket and remove
the cover shield.
D. Put the oil fill tube, with cap attached, in the valve
cover oil fill hole until you’re ready to replace the
cover shield.
5-17
4. After the engine cools,
open the coolant air
bleed valve.
If you see a stream of coolant coming from an air
bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise, close the
valve after the radiator is filled.
6. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine
and the compartment.
7. Replace the 3800 Series II V6 engine cover shield.
A. Remove the oil fill tube, with cap attached, from
the valve cover.
There is one bleed valve. It is located on the
thermostat housing.
5. Fill the radiator with the
proper DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture, up to
the base of the filler
neck. (See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index
for more information
about the proper
coolant mixture.)
5-18
B. Insert the catch tab on the cover shield under the
bracket on the engine.
C. Place the hole in the cover shield over the hole in
the valve cover. Install oil fill tube and cap by
twisting clockwise.
D. If you have the supercharged engine, install the
nut in the center of the cover shield.
8. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLD
mark on the coolant recovery tank.
9. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the pressure cap off.
10. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
11. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOLR coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches the
base of the filler neck.
5-19
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a
few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
12. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the
arrows on the pressure cap line up like this.
13. Check the coolant in the recovery tank. The level in
the coolant recovery tank should be at the HOT
mark when the engine is hot or at the COLD mark
when the engine is cold.
5-20
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a
skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move,
you can put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other side of the
vehicle, at the opposite end.
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
5-21
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you’ll need is in the trunk.
1. Turn the center nut on
the compact spare cover
counterclockwise to
remove it. Then lift and
remove the cover.
(See “Compact Spare
Tire” in the Index for
more information about
the compact spare.)
2. Remove the spare tire.
5-22
3. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise and
remove it. Then remove the jack and wrench.
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A), extension
and protection guide (B) and wheel wrench (C).
5-23
Wheel Center Caps
Wheel Covers
To remove a center cap, use
the wrench to pry gently at
the notch. Don’t use a tool
that is narrower than the
wrench to pry at this notch.
Then pry off the cap.
If your vehicle is equipped
with wheel covers, be sure
to use a wheel wrench to
begin the process of
loosening the plastic wheel
nut caps. Once you have
loosened the plastic nut caps
with the wheel wrench,
if needed, you can finish
loosening them with
your fingers.
Then, using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pry
along the edge of the wheel cover until it comes off.
Be careful; the edge may be sharp. Don’t try to remove
the cover with your bare hands.
5-24
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
CAUTION:
1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove them yet.
2. Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the jack lift
head a few inches.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
5-25
3. For jacking at the vehicle’s front location, put the
jack lift head about 6 inches (15 cm) from the rear
edge of the front wheel opening or just behind the
two bolts as shown.
5-26
4. For jacking at the vehicle’s rear location, put the jack
lift head about 5 inches (13 cm) from the front edge
of the rear wheel opening or just behind the off-set
as shown. Put the compact spare tire near you.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
CAUTION:
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the spare tire to fit under the vehicle.
6. Remove all wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel
to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.
5-27
CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
8. Put the wheel nuts back
on with the rounded end
of the nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten each nut
by hand until the wheel
is held against the hub.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-28
10. Tighten the wheel
nuts firmly in a
crisscross sequence
as shown.
CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose
and even come off. This could lead to an accident.
Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, be sure to get new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to
100 lb-ft (140 N·m).
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
Don’t try to put the wheel cover on your compact
spare tire. It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover in the
trunk until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
NOTICE:
Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact spare.
If you try to put a wheel cover on your compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
5-29
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
After you’ve put the compact tire on your vehicle, you’ll
put the compact spare tire on your vehicle, you’ll need
to store the flat tire in your trunk. Use the following
procedure to secure the flat tire in the trunk.
When storing a full-size tire you must use the extension
with the protector/guide to help avoid wheel surface
damage. Use the extension and protector/guide located
in the foam holder. To store a full-size tire, place the
tire valve stem facing down, and then remove the
protector/guide and attach the retainer securely.
Store the cover as far forward as possible.
5-30
When reinstalling a compact spare tire, put the
protector/guide back in the foam holder.
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
A. Retainer
B. Cover
CAUTION:
C. Compact Spare Tire
D. Nut
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as you
can. See “Compact Spare Tire” in the Index. See the
storage instructions label to replace your compact spare
into your trunk properly.
E. Jack
F. Wrench
G. Lock Nut Tool
H. Foam Holder
I. Extension and
Protector/Guide
J. Bolt Screw
Be sure to calibrate your low tire pressure system after
you replace your compact spare tire with a full-sized
one. See “Low Tire Inflation Monitor” in the Index.
5-31
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,
you should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire
repaired or replaced where you want. You must calibrate
the tire pressure monitor system after installing or
removing the compact spare. See “Tire Pressure
Monitor” in the Index. The system may not work
correctly when the compact spare is installed on the
vehicle. You must calibrate the tire inflation monitor
system after installing or removing the compact spare.
See “Tire Inflation Monitor” in the Index. The system
may not work correctly when the compact spare is
installed on the vehicle. Of course, it’s best to replace
your spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can.
Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in case
you need it again.
5-32
NOTICE:
When the compact spare is installed, don’t take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on
the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare
tire and its wheel together.
NOTICE:
Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using
them can damage your vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on your
compact spare.
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
NOTICE:
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin
your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking”
can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transaxle back and
forth, you can destroy your transaxle.
CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle
can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle has
the Traction Control System, you should turn the system
off. (See “Full-Range Traction Control System or Traction
Control System” in the Index.) Then shift back and forth
between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the
wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal
while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your
wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you will
cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle.
If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may
need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out,
see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
5-33
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information,
and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-2
6-3
6-5
6-6
6-8
6-8
6-12
6-12
6-17
6-18
6-20
6-23
6-27
6-28
6-29
6-33
Service
Fuel
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under the Hood
3800 Supercharged V6 Engine (If Equipped)
Engine Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Engine Coolant
Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
Brakes
Battery
6-33
6-42
6-52
6-52
6-55
6-55
6-55
6-57
6-57
6-59
6-60
6-60
6-66
6-67
6-68
Bulb Replacement
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield and
Wiper Blades
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome-Plated
Wheels (If Equipped)
Cleaning Tires
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
6-
6-1
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this manual
can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service
and Owner Publications” in the Index.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see “Servicing Your
Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
6-2
CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
D Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
D Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.
Fuel
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number
(VIN) shows the code letter for your engine. You will
find the VIN at the top left of your instrument panel.
(See “Vehicle Identification Number” in the Index.)
If you have the 3800 V6 engine (VIN Code K), use
regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher.
If you’re using fuel rated at the recommended octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service. But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging
noise when you’re accelerating or driving up a hill.
That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higher
octane fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy,
constant knock that means you have a problem.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of
your vehicle.
6-3
If you have the 3800 Supercharged V6 engine
(VIN Code 1), use premium unleaded gasoline rated
at 91 octane or higher. With the 3800 Supercharged
engine, in an emergency, you may be able to use a lower
octane -- as low as 87 -- if heavy knocking does not
occur. If you are using 91 or higher octane unleaded
gasoline and you hear heavy knocking, your engine
needs service.
It is recommended that the gasoline meet specifications
which have been developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association (AAMA) and endorsed by
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers Association
for better vehicle performance and engine protection.
Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could
provide improved driveability and emission control
system performance compared to other gasolines.
Be sure the posted octane for premium is at least 91
(at least 87 for regular). If the octane is less than 87,
you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive.
If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.
6-4
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control
label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. If such fuels are not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your
vehicle may fail a smog-check test. (See “Malfunction
Indicator Lamp” in the Index.) If this occurs, return to
your authorized Buick dealer for diagnosis to determine
the cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the
cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask your service station operator whether or
not the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not
recommend the use of such gasolines. If fuels containing
MMT are used, spark plug life may be reduced and your
emission control system performance may be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument
panel may turn on. If this occurs, return to your
authorized Buick dealer for service.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel
system, allowing your emission control system to
function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add
anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing
oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to
contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that
you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply with
the specifications described earlier.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
You can also write us at the following address for
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
6-5
Filling Your Tank
CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
While refueling, let the cap hang by the tether below the
fuel fill opening.
To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if you let
go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right.
The tethered cap is behind a hinged door on the driver’s
side of your vehicle.
6-6
CAUTION:
If you get gasoline on yourself and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the
fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen
if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all the way.
The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light will come on if the
fuel cap is not properly reinstalled.
NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right
type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light
and your fuel tank and emissions system may be
damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure
you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
6-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can
be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
D Dispense gasoline only into
approved containers.
D Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
D Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
D Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
6-8
Checking Things Under the Hood
CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, first
pull the handle inside
the vehicle, located just
below the instrument panel
and to the left of the
steering column.
Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood release. Lift the hood.
6-9
When you open the hood on the 3800 V6 engine, you’ll see:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
Battery
Radiator Fill Cap
Remote Positive (+) Battery Terminal
Engine Coolant Recovery Tank
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6-10
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
When you open the hood of the 3800 V6 Supercharged engine, you’ll see:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
Battery
Radiator Fill Cap
Remote Positive (+) Battery Terminal
Engine Coolant Recovery Tank
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
6-11
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then just pull the hood down and close
it firmly.
Engine Oil
If the LOW OIL light
appears on the instrument
panel, it means you need to
check your engine oil level
right away. For more
information, see “Low Oil
Level Light” in the Index.
3800 Supercharged V6 Engine
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have a 3800 Supercharged V6 engine.
The supercharger is a device which is designed to pump
more air into the engine than it would normally use.
This air is mixed with fuel, which creates increased
engine power. Since the supercharger is a pump and is
driven from an engine accessory drive belt, increased
pressure is available at all driving conditions.
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM), works with a
vacuum control to regulate the increased pressure
required during specific driving conditions. When this
increased pressure or boost is not desired, such as during
idling and light throttle cruising, the excess air that the
supercharger is pumping is routed through a bypass.
All of these controls working together provide high
performance character and fuel efficiency in the
3800 Supercharged V6 engine.
6-12
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
Checking Engine Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is the yellow loop near
the front of the engine.
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick
might not show the actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”
in the Index.
6-13
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so
much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper
operating range, your engine could be damaged.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the starburst symbol.
This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any
oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.
If you change your own oil,
be sure you use oil that has
the starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container.
If you have your oil changed for you, be sure the oil
put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute
certified for gasoline engines.
The engine oil fill cap is located toward the front of the
engine near the yellow-looped engine oil dipstick handle.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
6-14
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart:
As shown in the chart, SAE 10W-30 is best for your
vehicle. However, you can use SAE 5W-30 if it’s going
to be colder than 60 F (16 C) before your next oil
change. When it’s very cold, you should use SAE
5W-30. These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils,
such as SAE 20W-50.
_
_
NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage
not covered by your warranty.
GM GoodwrenchR oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperature falls below
-20_F (-29_C), consider using either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
6-15
t
Engine Oil Additives
How to Reset the GM Oil Life System
Don’t add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good
performance and engine protection.
After changing the engine oil, the system must be reset.
With the ignition key in RUN but the engine off, fully
push and release the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within five seconds. If the CHANGE OIL SOON light
flashes, the system is resetting. Turn the key to OFF,
then start the vehicle. The oil life will change to 100%.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON light comes back on, the
system has not reset. Repeat the procedure. (If you have
a Driver Information Center, the system may be reset by
pressing the DIC RESET button for five seconds while
viewing the oil life display on the DIC. See “Driver
Information Center” in the Index.)
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer that lets you know when to
change your engine oil. This is not based on mileage,
but on engine revolutions and engine operating
temperature. When the computer has calculated that the
oil needs changing, the GM Oil Life System will
indicate that a change is necessary. The mileage between
oil and filter changes will vary depending on how you
drive your vehicle -- usually between 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) and 7,500 miles (12 500 km) since your
last oil and filter change. Under severe conditions, the
system may come on before 3,000 miles (5 000 km).
Never drive your vehicle more than 7,500 miles
(12 500 km) or 12 months (whichever occurs first)
without an oil change.
t
The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So, if you drive
in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner. Remember to
reset the CHANGE OIL SOON light whenever the oil
is changed.
6-16
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw
away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See
the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.)
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil
from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil
by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If
you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter
is located underneath a
diagonal brace on the
driver’s side of the engine.
To check or replace the air filter:
1. Loosen the wing nut on the air duct and lift up on the
two clips located on the top of the filter assembly.
2. Then disconnect the duct and reposition it while
removing the side cover.
3. Pull out the filter.
4. Replace the air filter if necessary and be sure to
install the cover tightly when you are finished.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
replace the air filter.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
6-17
CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the
engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
NOTICE:
If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you’re driving.
6-18
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The passenger compartment
air filter is located
underneath your hood just
below the windshield wiper
arm, on the passenger’s side
(underneath the air inlet
grille) of the vehicle.
The filter traps most of the pollen from the air entering
the air conditioning module. Like your engine’s air
cleaner filter, it may need to be changed periodically.
For information on how often to change the passenger
compartment air filter, see “Maintenance Schedule” in
the Index.
To change the passenger compartment air filter, use the
following steps:
9. Reposition the air inlet grille.
10. Reinstall the air inlet grille retainers.
1. Turn off the ignition when the windshield wipers are
in the up position.
11. Reposition the hood weatherstrip.
2. Raise the hood.
12. Reconnect the windshield washer pump hose to the
fender rail and air inlet grille.
3. Disconnect the windshield washer pump hose from
the fender rail and air inlet grille.
13. Close the hood.
4. Reposition the hood weatherstrip from the passenger’s
side of the vehicle (peel back halfway to center).
5. Remove the air inlet grille retainers.
14. Return the windshield wipers to the park position.
Supercharger Oil
Unless you are
technically qualified
and have the proper
tools, you should
let your dealer or
a qualified service
center perform
this maintenance.
6. Remove the air inlet grille.
7. Remove the passenger compartment air filter.
8. Then replace the old air filter with the new one. For
the type of filter to use, see “Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts” in the Index.
6-19
When to Check
Check oil level every 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or every
36 months, whichever occurs first.
What Kind of Oil to Use
Use only the recommended supercharger oil. See
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
How to Check and Add Oil
Check oil only when the engine is cold. Allow the
engine to cool two to three hours after running.
CAUTION:
If you remove the supercharger oil fill plug while
the engine is hot, pressure may cause hot oil to
blow out of the oil fill hole. You may be burned.
Do not remove the plug until the engine cools.
1. Clean the area around the oil fill plug before
removing it.
2. Remove the oil fill plug using a 3/16 inch
Allen wrench.
6-20
3. The oil level is correct when it just reaches the
bottom of the threads of the inspection hole.
4. Replace the oil plug with the O-ring in place.
Torque to 88 lb-in (10 N·m).
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
D In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher.
D In hilly or mountainous terrain.
D When doing frequent trailer towing.
D Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of
these conditions, change the fluid and filter at
100,000 miles (166 000 km).
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at the dealership
service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading on
the dipstick.
NOTICE:
D In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
D While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180_F to 200_F
(82_C to 93_C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50_F
(10_C). If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C), you may
have to drive longer.
Checking the Fluid Level
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts
or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if you check your
transaxle fluid.
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
D Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
D With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
D With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:
D When outside temperatures are above 90_F (32_C).
D At high speed for quite a while.
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
D Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
6-21
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The automatic transaxle fluid dipstick is the red loop
located toward the rear of the engine.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
6-22
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the
cross-hatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transaxle fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on
the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one
pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRONR-III, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transaxle.
Damage caused by fluid other than
DEXRONR-III is not covered by your new
vehicle warranty.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOLR engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOLR extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating or if you need to add coolant to your
radiator, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOLR coolant will:
D
D
D
D
D
Give freezing protection down to -34_F (-37_C).
Give boiling protection up to 265_F (129_C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
6-23
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you
use only DEX-COOLR (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the
use of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
6-24
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOLR coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you
don’t need to add anything else.
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOLR coolant.
NOTICE:
If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core
and other parts.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a
level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant
level should be at the
COLD mark or a little
higher. When your engine is
warm, the level should be
up to the HOT mark or a
little higher.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful.
If this LOW COOLANT
light comes on and stays on,
it means you’re low on
engine coolant.
6-25
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be
careful not to spill it.
If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty, add
coolant to the radiator. (See “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.)
CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost
never have to add coolant at the radiator. Never
turn the radiator pressure cap -- even a little -when the engine and radiator are hot.
6-26
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.
For information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see “Cooling System” in the Index.
Radiator Pressure Cap
NOTICE:
Your radiator cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to
prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap
line up with the overflow tube on the radiator
filler neck.
Power Steering Fluid
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove
the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If necessary,
add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
When the engine compartment is hot, the level should be
at the HOT mark. If the fluid is at the ADD mark, you
should add fluid.
6-27
What to Use
Adding Washer Fluid
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY.
Add washer fluid until the tank is full.
6-28
NOTICE:
D When using concentrated washer fluid,
D
D
D
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other parts of the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damage the tank if it is
completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is on the driver’s
side of the engine compartment. It is filled with DOT-3
brake fluid.
6-29
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the
reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid
goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake
lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level
goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out
of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your
brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See “Brake System Warning
Light” in the Index.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.
Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the
Maintenance Schedule.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
6-30
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
NOTICE:
D Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
D
brake system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts so badly that they’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn
and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or
be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when
you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
6-31
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Brake Adjustment
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to GM specifications.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of
this manual under Part C “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections.”
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
6-32
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake
parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system -- for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you have to have new ones put in -- be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you
don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change -- for the worse. The braking
performance you’ve come to expect can change in many
other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.
Battery
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelcoR battery. When it’s time for a new battery,
get one that has the replacement number shown on
the original battery’s label. We recommend an
ACDelco battery.
If your battery has a very low charge or is dead, you
may not be able to remove the ignition key from the
ignition switch or shift out of PARK (P). Refer to
“Shifting Out of PARK (P)” in the Index.
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or
more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from the
battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
Bulb Replacement
In this section you’ll find directions for changing the
bulbs on your vehicle. See “Replacement Bulbs” in the
Index to find the type of bulb you should use.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer service department.
Halogen Bulbs
CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
6-33
Headlamps
3. Slide the headlamp assembly out of the slots.
For the type of bulb, see “Replacement Bulbs” in
the Index.
4. Remove the bulb socket from the
headlamp assembly.
5. Remove the rubber access cover (from behind the
bulb you are replacing).
1. Open the hood.
2. Pull up on the headlamp retainers to release the
assembly locator tabs.
6-34
6. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter turn and remove it
from the lamp.
7. Lift the plastic locking tab on the electrical
connector and pull the connector from the headlamp
bulb socket.
8. Connect the new headlamp bulb to the wiring
harness, making sure the connector tab snaps
into place.
NOTICE:
To make sure your headlamps are aimed
properly, read all the instructions before
beginning. Failure to follow these instructions
could cause damage to headlamp parts.
9. Insert the bulb socket into the headlamp assembly.
10. Reverse all steps to reassemble the headlamp
assembly, then check the lamps.
Headlamp Aiming
Your vehicle has a headlamp system equipped with
horizontal and vertical aim indicators. The aim has
been pre-set at the factory and should need no further
adjustment. This is true even though your vertical and
horizontal aim indicators may not fall exactly on the
“0” (zero) marks on their scales.
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp
aim may be affected. Aim adjustment may be necessary
if it is difficult to see lane markers (for horizontal aim),
or if oncoming drivers flash their high beams at you (for
vertical aim). If you believe your headlamps need to be
re-aimed, we recommend that you take it to your dealer
for service; however, it is possible for you to re-aim
your headlamps as described in the following procedure.
To check the aim, the vehicle should be properly
prepared as follows:
D The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly
level surface.
D If necessary, pads may be used on an uneven surface.
D The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or mud
attached to it.
D The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other
D
D
D
D
work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done.
There should not be any cargo or loading of the
vehicle, except it should have a full tank of fuel and
one person or 160 lbs. (75 kg) on the driver’s seat.
Close all doors.
Tires should be properly inflated.
Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspension.
6-35
Driver’s Side Headlamp Shown
Passenger’s Side Headlamp Shown
A. Vertical aim adjustment screw
A. Horizontal aim adjustment screw
B. Horizontal aim adjustment screw
B. Horizontal block index plate
Open the hood and locate the vertical and horizontal aim
indicators. The aiming screw for the vertical aim
indicator (A) is at the center of the headlamp cover and
the aiming screw for the horizontal aim indicator is on
the outboard side of the headlamp cover (B).
C. Vertical aiming level
6-36
Start with the horizontal aim. The adjustment screws can
be turned with an E8 TorxR socket.
Once the horizontal aim is adjusted, then adjust the
vertical aim.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
1. Open the trunk.
1. Turn the horizontal aiming screw until the indicator
is lined up with zero.
2. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the level bubble
is lined up with zero.
Front Parking and Turn Signal Lamp
1. Remove the headlamp assembly. Refer to the
removal procedure earlier in this section.
2. Remove the rubber bulb access cover.
3. Twist the sidemarker lamp socket counterclockwise
and pull from the headlamp assembly.
4. Holding the base of the bulb, pull the bulb from
the socket.
5. Push the new bulb into the socket.
2. Reach through the access opening in the trunk.
6. Reverse these steps to reinstall the lamp assembly.
6-37
Tail/Stop/Turn Signal Lamp
3. Remove the bulb by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
4. Place the new bulb into the bulb socket.
5. Turn the bulb one-quarter turn clockwise to replace.
6. Close the trunk.
1. Remove the three plastic wing nuts (A). (Pliers may
be required to remove the wing nuts.)
There is one wing nut located on the outside of the
carpet. The other two are located underneath
the carpet.
6-38
2. Pull the taillamp housing (B) away from the body of
the vehicle.
Trunk Lid Applique
3. Squeeze the tab on the socket and turn the
socket counterclockwise.
4. Pull out the socket.
5. Pull the bulb out of the socket. (There are two bulbs
on each taillamp.)
6. Push in a new bulb.
7. Reverse these steps to reinstall the lamp assembly.
1. Open the trunk lid halfway.
2. Remove the wing nuts (A) from the studs on the
applique. (There are eight wing nuts. Pliers may be
required to remove them.)
3. Remove the applique from the trunk lid.
4. Turn the sockets (B) counterclockwise.
6-39
5. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
6. Push in the new bulb.
5. Twist and push the back-up lamp socket into the
trunk lid applique.
7. Reinstall the socket in the housing and
turn clockwise.
6. Reinstall the trunk lid applique.
8. Connect the applique to the lid.
1. Grasp the front center and rear center positions of the
dome lamp housing and squeeze together until the
housing releases from the base plate. A screwdriver
may be necessary to pry the assembly loose.
9. Reconnect the wing nuts to the studs on the
applique and hand-tighten.
10. Close the trunk lid.
Dome Lamp (If Equipped)
Back-Up Lamp
The back-up lamps are located in the trunk lid applique.
2. Lift the plastic locking tab on the electrical
connector and pull the connector from the dome
lamp assembly.
(Refer to the trunk lid applique removal procedure
earlier in this section for further instructions.)
3. Grasp the bulb housing located in the center of the
assembly and pull straight up.
1. Remove the trunk lid applique.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
2. Twist and pull the back-up lamp socket from the
trunk lid applique.
5. Push in a new bulb.
3. Twist and pull the old bulb from the back-up
lamp socket.
4. Twist and push the new bulb into the back-up
lamp socket.
6-40
6. Reinstall the socket into the dome lamp assembly.
7. Reconnect the dome lamp assembly to the
wiring harness, making sure the connector tab
snaps into place.
8. Reposition the dome lamp assembly to the roof, and
gently push the assembly into the base plate.
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” in the Index for more information.
1. Turn on the wipers to LO.
2. Turn off the ignition while the wipers are at the
outer positions of the wiper pattern. The blades are
more accessible for removal/replacement while in
this position.
3. Pull the windshield wiper arm 3 to 4 inches
(7.5 to 10 cm) away from the windshield.
4. While holding the wiper arm away from the glass,
push the release clip from under the windshield
wiper arm connecting point and slide the blade
assembly down toward the glass to remove it from
the wiper arm.
5. Slide the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm
until you hear the release clip “click” into place.
For wiper blade replacement length and type, see
“Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in the Index.
6-41
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your Buick Warranty booklet for details.
CAUTION: (Continued)
D Underinflated tires pose the same danger as
CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
D Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air-out and a serious
accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
CAUTION: (Continued)
6-42
D
D
overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact -- such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Tire-Loading Information label, which is on the
inside of the trunk lid, shows the correct inflation
pressures for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold”
means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three
hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can
get the following:
D Too much flexing
D Too much heat
D Tire overloading
D Bad wear
D Bad handling
D Bad fuel economy.
NOTICE: (Continued)
NOTICE: (Continued)
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
D Unusual wear
D Bad handling
D Rough ride
D Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at
60 psi (420 kPa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
6-43
Tire Inflation Monitor System
The tire inflation monitor system can alert you to a large
change in the pressure of one tire. The system “learns”
the pressure at each tire throughout the operating speed
range of your vehicle. The system normally takes
between 45 and 90 minutes of driving to learn the tire
pressures. This time may be longer depending on your
individual driving habits. Learning need not be
accumulated during a single trip. Once learned, the
system will remember the tire pressures until the system
is recalibrated.
After the system has learned tire pressures with properly
inflated tires, the LOW TIRE light will come on if the
pressure in one tire becomes 12 psi (83 kPa) lower than
the other three tires. The tire inflation monitor system
won’t alert you if the pressure in more than one tire is
low, if the system is not properly calibrated, or if the
vehicle is moving faster than 70 mph (110 km/h).
The tire inflation monitor system detects differences in
tire rotation speeds that are caused by changes in tire
pressure. The system can alert you about a low
tire -- but it doesn’t replace normal tire maintenance.
See “Tires” in the Index.
6-44
When the LOW TIRE light comes on, you should stop
as soon as you can and check all your tires for damage.
(If a tire is flat, see “If a Tire Goes Flat” in the Index.)
Also check the tire pressure in all four tires as soon as
you can. See “Inflation - Tire Pressure” in the Index.
The light will come on and stay on until you turn off the
ignition or reset (calibrate) the system.
Don’t reset the tire inflation monitor system without first
correcting the cause of the problem and checking and
adjusting the pressure in all four tires. If you reset the
system when the tire pressures are incorrect, the system
will not work properly and may not alert you when a tire
is low.
Any time you adjust a tire’s pressure, rotate your tires,
or have one or more tires repaired or replaced, you’ll
need to reset (calibrate) the tire inflation monitor
system. You’ll also need to reset the system whenever
you buy new tires and whenever the vehicle’s battery
has been disconnected.
To reset (calibrate) the system: turn the ignition switch
to RUN. Then press and hold the RESET button for
about five seconds. The red RESET button is located
inside your instrument panel fuse block. The fuse block
is located under the cover labeled FUSES, which is at
the end of the instrument panel on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle. The RESET button is the first button in
the top row of the fuse block. The LOW TIRE light will
come on and flash three times. Then it will go off. If the
light doesn’t go off, see your dealer for service.
The system completes the calibration process
during driving.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual wear,
rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and “Wheel
Replacement” later in this section for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled
rotation intervals.
The system normally takes 15 to 20 minutes of driving
in each of three speed ranges to “learn” tire pressures.
The speed ranges are 15 to 40 mph (25 to 65 km/h),
40 to 65 mph (65 to 105 km/h) and above 65 mph
(105 km/h). When learning is complete, the system will
alert you after 2-8 minutes if a tire is 12 psi (83 kPa)
different from the other three tires. Detection thresholds
may be higher and detection times may be longer on
rough roads, curves and at high speeds. The system is
not capable of detection at speeds greater than 70 mph
(110 km/h).
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
6-45
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your
tire rotation.
When It’s Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire-Loading
Information label. Reset the Tire Inflation Monitor
system. See “Tire Inflation Monitor System” in the
Index. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.
CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When you change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,
if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
(See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.)
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
D You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
D You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
D The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.
D The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
D The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or location
of the damage.
6-46
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need,
look at the Tire-Loading Information label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same
size and type tires on all wheels.
It’s all right to drive with your compact spare,
though. It was developed for use on your vehicle.
CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could
fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
6-47
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
6-48
Traction -- AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature -- A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required
by law.
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
6-49
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for replacement.
6-50
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or
how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
and cause an accident. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
NOTICE:
If your vehicle has P225/60R16 size tires, don’t
use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle
because there’s not enough clearance.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.
NOTICE: (Continued)
NOTICE: (Continued)
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
If you have other tires, use tire chains only where
legal and only when you must. Use only SAE
Class “S” type chains that are the proper size for
your tires. Install them on the front tires and
tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the
chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can
hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and
retighten them. If the contact continues, slow
down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning
the wheels with chains on will damage
your vehicle.
6-51
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
6-52
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
D
D
D
D
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and
Soil Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will
clean normal spots and stains very well. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
(See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)
Here are some cleaning tips:
D
D
D
D
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area
often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and
blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
D If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the
2. If a stain remains, follow the multi-purpose interior
cleaner instructions described earlier.
Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner on
Fabric
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
entire area immediately or it will set.
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section.
Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on
the container label to form thick suds.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge.
Don’t saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to
dry completely.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove the suds.
3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for
Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
6-53
Cleaning Vinyl
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
D Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do it more than once.
D Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain
if you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean
cloth and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer
for this product.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Cleaning Leather
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft
cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the
leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Care of Safety Belts
D For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
Keep belts clean and dry.
dealer for this product.
D Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
CAUTION:
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
D Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.
6-54
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or
a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. (See
“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they may have to be scraped off later.
If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.
Cleaning the Outside of the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. (See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM
Windshield Cleaner, Bon AmiR Powder (non-scratching
glass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse
it with water.
6-55
Washing Your Vehicle
Finish Care
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.)
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or
chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
(See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on
the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a
soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid
surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
6-56
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Cleaning Tires
Cleaning Aluminum or
Chrome-Plated Wheels (If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care
to wipe off any overspray or splash from all
painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the
vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage
the paint finish and tires.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners
with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because
you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish
on aluminum wheels.
6-57
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do
this for you.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Sheet Metal Damage
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan
and exhaust system even though they have
corrosion protection.
6-58
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into
the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Buick
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
PART NUMBER
994954
1050172
1050173
1050174
1050214
1050427
SIZE
23 in. x 25 in.
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
32 oz. (0.946 L)
23 oz. (0.680 L)
1052918**
8 oz. (0.237 L)
DESCRIPTION
Polishing Cloth – Wax Treated
Tar and Road Oil Remover
Chrome Cleaner and Polish
White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
t Protectant
Armor All
Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner
1052929
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Wheel Cleaner
1052930
8 oz. (0.237 L)
Capture Dry Spot Remover
12345721
2.5 sq. ft.
Synthetic Chamois
12345725
12 oz. (0.354 L)
Silicone Tire Shine
12377964*
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Finish Enhancer
12377966*
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Cleaner Wax
12377984*
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Surface Cleaner
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
1052925
16 oz. (0.473 L)
USAGE
Exterior polishing cloth
Removes tar, road oil and asphalt
Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass
Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls
Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops
Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints
Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas , plastic,
rubber and vinyl
Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels
and floor mats
Spray on and rinse with water
Attracts, absorbs and removes soils on fabric
Shines vehicle without scratching
Spray on tire shine
Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants
Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish
Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks
* For exterior use only.
** Not recommended for use on instrument panels.
t
6-59
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
D the model designation,
D paint information and
D a list of all production options and
special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Electrical System
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the inside of the trunk lid.
It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
On this label is:
D your VIN,
6-60
Add-On Electrical Equipment
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as
they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
Headlamp Wiring
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker in
the underhood electrical center. An electrical overload
will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases
to remain off. If this happens, have your headlamp
system checked right away.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself. This
greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by
electrical problems.
Windshield Wipers
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Some fuses are located
in a fuse block on the
passenger’s side of the
instrument panel. Pull off
the cover labeled FUSES to
expose the fuses.
6-61
Fuse
PARK LOCK
Blank
Blank
PCM, BCM,
U/H RELAY
Circuit
Breaker
TIRE RESET
Description
Tire Inflation Monitor
Reset Button
PWR WINDOWS, Power Windows, Power Sunroof
PWR SUNROOF
REAR DEFOG
Rear Window Defogger
POWER SEATS
Power Seats
Blank
Not Used
6-62
RADIO PREM.
SOUND
POWER
MIRRORS
Blank
PANEL
DIMMING
Blank
IGN 0, CLUSTER,
PCM, BCM
Blank
Blank
DRL
Description
Ignition Key Solenoid
Not Used
Not Used
Ignition Signal: Hot in Run and
Start, Powertrain Control
Module, Body Control Module,
Underhood Relay
Remote Radio Premium Sound
Power Mirrors
Not Used
Panel Dimming
Not Used
Ignition Signal: Hot in Run,
Unlock and Start, Cluster,
Powertrain Control Module,
Body Control Module
Not Used
Not Used
Daytime Running
Lamps Module
Fuse
INADV POWER
BUS
DOOR LOCKS
Blank
TAIL LAMPS,
LIC LAMPS
RADIO
HEATED MIRROR
CRUISE
Blank
CLUSTER
CIGAR LTR,
DATA LINK
STOP LAMPS
Blank
FRT PARK LPS
Description
Interior Lamps, Retained
Accessory Power
Door Locks
Not Used
Taillamps, License Lamps
Radio
Heated Mirrors
Cruise Control
Not Used
Instrument Panel Cluster
Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary
Power Connection (Power
Drop), Data Link
Stoplamps
Not Used
Parking Lamps
Fuse
POWER DROP
Description
Auxiliary Power Connection
(Power Drop): Hot in ACC
and Run
CRANK SIGNAL, Crank Signal, Body Control
BCM, CLUSTER Module, Cluster, Powertrain
Control Module
HVAC
Ignition Signal, HVAC
Control Head
BTSI PARK
Shifter Lock Solenoid
LOCK
AIR BAG
Air Bag
BCM PWR
Body Control Module
HAZARD
Hazard Flashers
LH HEATED
Driver’s Heated Seat
SEAT
Blank
Not Used
BCM ACC
Ignition Signal: Hot in ACC and
Run, Body Control Module
Blank
Not Used
LOW BLOWER
Low Blower
6-63
Fuse
ABS
TURN SIGNALS,
CORN LPS
RADIO, HVAC,
RFA, CLUSTER
HIGH BLOWER
RH HEATED
SEAT
STRG WHL
CONT
WIPER
Description
Anti-Lock Brakes
Turn Signals, Cornering Lamps
Radio, HVAC Head, Remote
Keyless Entry, Cluster
High Blower
Passenger’s Heated Seat
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Wipers
Underhood Electrical Center -- Passenger’s Side
Some fuses and relays are located in the underhood
electrical center on the passenger’s side of the
engine compartment.
Maxi fuse
1
2
3
4
6-64
Description
ABS
Starter Solenoid
Power Seats, Rear Defog,
Heated Seats
High Blower, Hazard Flasher,
Stoplamps, Power Mirror, Door Locks
Maxi fuse
5
6
7
8
Mini relay
9
10
11
12
13
14
Description
Ignition Switch, BTSI, Stoplamps,
ABS, Turn Signals, Cluster, Air Bag,
DRL Module
Cooling Fan
Interior Lamps, Retained Accessory
Power, Keyless Entry, CEL TEL,
Data Link, HVAC Head, Cluster,
Radio, AUX Power (Power Drop),
Cigarette Lighter
Ignition Switch, Wipers, Radio,
Steering Wheel Controls, Body
Control Module, AUX Power
(Power Drop), Power Windows,
Sunroof, HVAC Controls, DRL,
Rear Defog Relay
Description
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 3
Starter Solenoid
Cooling Fan 1
Ignition Main
Air Pump (Optional)
Mini relay
15
16
17
18
19
Mini fuse
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Mini fuse
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Description
A/C Clutch
Horn
Fog Lamps
Fuel Pump, Speed Control (L67 only)
Fuel Pump
Description
Air Pump (Optional)
Generator
ECM
A/C Compressor Clutch
Cooling Fan
Electronic Ignition
Transaxle
Description
Horn
Fuel Injector
Oxygen Sensor
Engine Emissions
Fog Lamps
Headlamp (Right)
Rear Compartment Release
6-65
Mini fuse
34
35
Mini fuse
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
SYMBOL
Description
Parking Lamps
Fuel Pump
Description
Headlamp (Left)
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Fuse Puller
A/C Compressor Clutch Diode
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamps
Bulb Number
Back-up
1156
Center High-Mounted Stop
3155
Front Parking/Turn Signal
4157NAK
Headlamp, High Beam
9005
Headlamp, Low Beam
9006
Stop/Tail/Turn Signal
3057
Tail (Applique)
194
Interior Lamps
Bulb Number
Dome Lamp
9425542
For service information on these bulbs, contact your
dealer service department.
6-66
Capacities and Specifications
Automatic Transaxle
Pan Removal and Replacement . . 7.4 quarts (7.0 L)
After Complete Overhaul . . . . . 10.0 quarts (9.5 L)
*When draining/replacing converter, more fluid will
be needed.
Cooling System Including Reservoir
3800 V6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 quarts (11.6 L)
3800 Supercharged V6 . . . . . . . 12.3 quarts (11.6 L)
Refrigerant,
Air Conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.88 lbs. (0.85 kg)
Engine Crankcase
Oil and Filter Change . . . . . . . . . 4.5 quarts (4.3 L)
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . 100 lb-ft (140 N·m)
Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0 U.S. gallons (64.3 L)
Engine Specifications
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3800 V6 (VIN Engine Code K)
3800 Supercharged V6 (VIN Engine Code 1)
Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 CID
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6-5-4-3-2
Thermostat Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 195_F (91_C)
Horsepower, 3800 V6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 @ 5200
Horsepower, 3800 Supercharged V6 . . . . 240 @ 5200
*Note: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be
sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in
this manual. See “Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
6-67
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Engine/Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . AC Type A1208C
Passenger Compartment Air Filter . . . . 10406026
Battery
3800 V6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type 690 CCA
3800 Supercharged V6 . . . . . . . AC Type 770 CCA
Engine Oil Filter
All Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type PF47
Radiator Cap
All Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type RC27
Remote Keyless Entry Batteries
Type CR2032 (2) or equivalent
Spark Plugs
3800 V6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type 41-921
Gap: 0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
3800 Supercharged
V6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type 41-921 or NGK Type
PTR4B-15 . . . . . . . . Gap: 0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
Wiper Blade
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hook
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.0 inches (56.0 cm)
6-68
Vehicle Dimensions
Wheelbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109.1 inches (277.1 cm)
Front Tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62.0 inches (157.6 cm)
Rear Tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61.3 inches (155.6 cm)
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196.2 inches (498.4 cm)
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72.7 inches (184.5 cm)
Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56.6 inches (143.8 cm)
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7- 2
7-4
7-15
Introduction
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
7-19
7-21
7-23
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Part E: Maintenance Record
7-
7-1
Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
Maintenance Requirements
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet, or your dealer
for details.
7-2
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure to
follow recommended maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.
CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can
be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service department
or another qualified service center should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help keep
your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or
their equivalents, should be used whether you do the
work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to
record and keep track of the maintenance performed on
your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts. They may
be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs.
If you want to get the service information, see “Service
and Owner Publications” in the Index.
7-3
Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle
in good working condition. But we don’t know exactly
how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short distances
only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances
all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work,
to do errands or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your dealer.
7-4
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them. If you
go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
D carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Tire-Loading Information label. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
D are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
D use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.
Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
Footnotes
[ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under
“Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of
this schedule.
Engine Oil Scheduled Maintenance
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the GM
Oil Life Systemt (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Reset the system. The system will
show you when to change the oil -- usually between
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and 7,500 miles (12 500 km)
since your last oil change. Under severe conditions, the
indicator may come on before 3,000 miles (5 000 km).
Never drive your vehicle more than 7,500 miles
(12 500 km) or 12 months without an oil and
filter change.
The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So if you drive
in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner if the CHANGE
OIL SOON light appears. Remember to reset the Oil
Life System when the oil and filter have been changed.
See “Oil Life System” in the Index for information
on resetting.
An Emission Control Service.
7-5
Scheduled Maintenance
7-6
Scheduled Maintenance
7-7
Scheduled Maintenance
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
j Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace
filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
j Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty
conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-8
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
Scheduled Maintenance
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
j Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty
conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
j Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
j For supercharged engines only: Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as
needed (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first). See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in this section.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-9
Scheduled Maintenance
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
j Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace
filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
j Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty
conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
j Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km).
7-10
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
Scheduled Maintenance
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
j Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty
j
j
j
j
conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
For supercharged engines only: Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as
needed (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first). See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in this section.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-11
Scheduled Maintenance
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
j Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace
filter if necessary. An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
j Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-12
Scheduled Maintenance
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
j Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty
conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
j For supercharged engines only: Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as
needed (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first). See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in this section.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-13
Scheduled Maintenance
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
j Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
j Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
j Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90_F
(32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transaxle fluid,
change both the fluid and filter.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
j Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
7-14
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Listed in this part are owner checks and services which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index
for further details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.
Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See “Tires” in the
Index for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the Index
for further details.
7-15
At Least Twice a Year
Automatic Transaxle Check
Restraint System Check
Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. See
“Automatic Transaxle Fluid” in the Index. A fluid loss
may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair
if needed.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or
miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
Lubricate all hinges and latches, including those for the
body doors, hood, secondary latch, pivots, spring
anchor, release pawl, rear compartment, glove box door,
console door and any folding seat hardware. Part D tells
you what to use. More frequent lubrication may be
required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. (See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in
the Index.)
7-16
Body Lubrication Service
Starter Switch Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking
Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the
regular brake.
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary).
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
7-17
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
D The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
D The key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle PARK (P)
Mechanism Check
CAUTION:
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
D To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
D To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.
7-18
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department or other qualified service center do
these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive
Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals if necessary.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which could
cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust”
in the Index.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. To help
ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling
system and pressure cap is recommended at least once
a year.
7-19
Throttle System Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any components that have high effort
or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and
cruise control cables.
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking
brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes
inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions
result in frequent braking.
7-20
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Engine Oil
Engine Oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified
For Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol of the proper viscosity. To
determine the preferred viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
Engine Coolant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only GM
GoodwrenchR DEX-COOLR
or HavolineR DEX-COOLR
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant”
in the Index.
USAGE
Hydraulic Brake
System
Windshield
Washer Solvent
Power Steering
System
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Delco Supreme 11R Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 Brake Fluid).
GM OptikleenR Washer Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515)
or equivalent.
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).
Automatic
Transaxle
DEXRONR-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
7-21
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Supercharger
Supercharger Oil (GM Part
No. 12345982). See “Supercharger
Oil” in the Index.
Hood and
Door Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
7-22
LubriplateR Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the
date, odometer reading and who performed the service
in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval.
Any additional information from “Owner Checks and
Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on
the following record pages. Also, you should retain all
maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio
is a convenient place to store them.
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-23
Maintenance Record
DATE
7-24
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-25
Maintenance Record
DATE
7-26
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how to contact Buick if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain service
publications and how to report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-6
8-7
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
Customer Assistance Offices
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
Roadside Assistance
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Courtesy Transportation
8-8
8-9
8-9
8-10
8-10
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
Ordering Owner Publications in Canada
8-
8-1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Buick. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be
resolved by your dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of
all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your
concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the
following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
8-2
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Buick Customer Relations Center by calling
1-800-521-7300. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
D Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate
at the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
When contacting Buick, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have
a concern.
STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you
continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, file with the
GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet
for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
D Dealership name and location
D Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
8-3
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you are required to resort to this informal dispute
resolution program prior to filing any court action, use of
the program is free of charge and your case will generally
be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the
decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed
with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
8-4
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Buick has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Buick by dialing: 1-800-83-BUICK. (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Buick encourages customers to call the toll-free number
for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write to Buick,
the letter should be addressed to Buick’s Customer
Relations Center.
United States
Buick Customer Relations Center
P.O. Box 5039
Troy, MI 48007-5039
1-800-521-7300
1-800-832-8425 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
All Overseas Locations
GMODC - Customer Communication Centre
169-007
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Telephone: 905-644-4112
Fax:
905-644-4866
Caribbean Numbers
1-800-496-9992 (English) Puerto Rico
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) Puerto Rico
1-800-751-4135 (English) Dominican Republic
1-800-751-4136 (Spanish) Dominican Republic
1-800-496-9994 U.S. Virgin Islands
1-800-389-0009 Bahamas
1-800-534-0122 Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua & B.V.I.
If toll free service is not available in the Caribbean,
call Puerto Rico 1-787-763-1315.
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward aftermarket driver
or passenger adaptive
equipment you may require
for your vehicle (hand
controls, wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The program is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call
the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. When
calling from outside Canada, please dial 1-905-644-3063.
All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
8-5
Roadside Assistance
Our commitment to Buick owners has always included
superior service through our network of over 2,800 Buick
dealers. Buick Premium Roadside Assistance provides an
extra measure of convenience and security.
BUICK PREMIUM ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE:
D Provides owners with access to minor repairs or
towing for disabled vehicles. Although Roadside
Assistance is not a repair facility, it is a means of
assisting customers in an emergency situation.
D Takes the anxiety out of uncertain situations by
providing easy access to service professionals trained
to work with Buick owners, 24 hours a day, 365 days
a year, including weekends and holidays.
Buick Motor Division is proud to offer Buick Premium
Roadside Assistance to customers for vehicles covered
under the 3 year/36,000 mile (60 000 km) new car
warranty (whichever occurs first).
8-6
For details on Buick Premium Roadside Assistance,
please consult your Buick Premium Roadside Assistance
owner booklet included with your owner’s manual. For
needed assistance, call the Buick Premium Roadside
Assistance toll-free hotline: 1-800-252-1112.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.
Courtesy Transportation
Buick has always exemplified quality and value in its
offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating dealers are proud to
offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support
program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with
the Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs are
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If your
vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department
immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for
service, unless, of course, the problem is safety-related.
If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this,
and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the
work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Buick helps
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one
way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from
the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative, reimbursement
for reasonable fuel expenses up to $10 per day (five day
maximum) may be available. Claim amounts should
reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts.
8-7
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide you
with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental
vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a maximum of
$30.00 per day supported by receipts. This requires that
you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state,
local and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are
responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage
or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is not
part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate
booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information” furnished with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage information.
8-8
Courtesy Transportation is available only at
participating dealers and all program options, such as
shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.
Please contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your
dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE CANADIAN
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
8-9
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
Ordering Owner Publications
in Canada
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-521-7300, or write:
Owner’s manuals are available for purchase for all
current and most past model General Motors vehicles.
Buick Customer Relations Center
P.O. Box 5039
Troy, MI 48007-5039
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
8-10
The toll-free telephone number for ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
2000 BUICK SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out
the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order,
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 2000 BUICK
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about the
vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
Schedule for all models.
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
2000 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $20.00
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:
Helm, Incorporated S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications are available for current and past
model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please
specify year and model name of the vehicle.
OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA–MasterCard–Discover)
8-11
ORDER TOLL FREE
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)
1-800-551-4123
(Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM EST)
FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927
2
0
0
0
PUBLICATION FORM
NUMBER
Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adequate time for postal
service. If further information is needed, write to the address shown below or call
1-800-551-4123. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return
information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied
against the original order.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
VEHICLE MODEL
NAME
YEAR
QTY.
PRICE
EACH*
Service Manual
Car & Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair
2000
$120.00
2000
$50.00
Owner’s Manual In Portfolio
2000
$20.00
Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio
2000
$15.00
TOTAL
PRICE
G
M
S
H
I
P
T
O
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the
name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Mail completed order form to:
HELM, INCORPORATED S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.
(CUSTOMER’S NAME)
(ATTENTION)
(STREET ADDRESS—NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
(CITY)
(STATE)
DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.
(ZIP CODE)
(
)
AREA CODE
GM-BUI-ORD00
8-12
*(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)
P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
Check or Money
Order payable to
Helm, Inc. (USA funds
only — do not send cash.)
TOTAL MATERIAL
Michigan Purchasers
add 6% sales tax
U.S. Order Processing
MasterCard
VISA
$6.00
Canadian Postage
(See Note Below)
GRAND TOTAL
Discover
Account
Number:
Expiration
Date mo/yr:
Check here if your billing address
is different from your shipping
address shown.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payable in U.S. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add $11.50 plus the
U.S. order processing.
Download PDF